Home

R&S FSW Transient Measurements User Manual

1. User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 291 R amp S FSW K60 List of Commands CALCulate HOPDetection STATes AUTO CAL Culate HObieiechion GTATesl DATA CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe COLumn CAL Culate HObieiechon TABlebRtGute 255 CALCulate HOPDetection TO HECKEN 256 CALCulate MSRA ALING SEIQW EE 250 CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue eese enne nennen eren neret nne e trenes etre nnns ense 250 CAL Culate MSbRAWINDow cnz NA 251 CAL e DEEN EE 213 CALCulate RESult LENGth 1213 CALG lat ee 214 CALCulate RESulERANGe AU TO decedente sete endet ohne Annan age e ade de edad ENEE 214 CAL Gulate RESult REF e TEE 214 CALCG lat RTMS ALINE SHOW EE 252 CALCulate RTMS ALINe VALUe 2 2 err plena rte eee retur etae avi i nega dee eng 252 CAL CulatehRT MS WINDow cnz MAL 252 CAL Gulate n DELTamarker AOEFF ornare eire ere rete Ya ice Yo FEE INI eed uoce HERE RARE Eu CALCulate nz DEI Tamarker mz LINK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT m CAlLCulate nz DEI Tamarker mz MAximum NENT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimMuUM RIGHL eene nennen nnne nennen neni CAlCulate nz D I Tamarker mz MAZimumf PDEART nnne CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum LEET CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum NEXT esses eene ener entren nennen nnns CAlLCulate
2. Hop Parameters State Index The nominal frequency levels are numbered consecutively in the Hop States table see chapter 6 3 2 Signal Detection Signal States on page 58 starting at 0 The state of a detected hop is defined as the index of the corresponding nominal frequency Remote command CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 255 SENSe HOP STATe on page 261 Hop Begin The relative time in ms from the capture start at which the signal first enters the toler ance area of a nominal hop within the analysis region The tolerance area is defined by the settling tolerance above and below the defined nominal hop frequencies Remote command CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 255 SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin on page 262 Dwell Time The duration of a hop from begin to end that is the time the signal remains in the tol erance area of a nominal hop frequency Remote command CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 255 SENSe HOP TIMing DWEL1 on page 263 Switching Time The time the signal requires to hop from one level to the next It is defined as the time between a hop end and the following hop begin The first switching time result can only be determined after the first hop has been detected Remote command CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe
3. m ge qg sug Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis RF Spectrum The RF Spectrum diagram displays the measured power levels for the detected hops chirps The displayed data corresponds to one particular frame in the spectrogram During a running measurement the most recently captured frame is always displayed During analysis which frame is displayed depends on the selected frame in the spec trogram configuration see Selecting a frame to display on page 95 or the marker position in the spectrogram see Frame on page 119 6 Full RF Spectrum 1AP Clrw CF 1 0 100 32 0 Meas BW 320 Fig 5 4 RF Spectrum result display Thus the RF Spectrum is useful to analyze the input signal measured at a specific time in more detail Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RFSP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 Spectrogram The spectrogram is a way of displaying multiple consecutive spectra over time The power or more exactly the power level which is usually displayed over frequency is displayed over frequency and time Thus joint analysis in the time and frequency domain is possible Graphically time and frequency represent the vertical and horizontal axes of the dia gram Each coordinate frequency f time t of the diagram is filled with a color repre senting the level for the respective frequency and time At the beginning of a m
4. User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 294 R amp S FSW K60 List of Commands ACC E ssm QU LAY out WINDOW ET EE 212 MMEMory STORe TA MEAS us MMEMOry STOResns TABELe i cu ene ep de e cde edi ga dte e EL ge al ea Eb ice 277 MMEMory STOR sn gt TRAC 634s E end 279 OUTPUEIFUIFEREQUCNGCY ie ccscisi R 171 QUTPut TRIGger port DIRectiOn 1 oru renun tine tna rnnt Ent tine true Ebook onera arn 181 OUTPUETRIGger lt port gt E 181 OUTPut TRIGger port OT YBe rater rrt rr tr euo ene nna ira ttn rir tieu rte EELSETE RAEE 182 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate essen nennen eee nen nennen rennen 182 OUTPUtTRIGger lt port gt PULL Gel ENG ENNER 182 SYSTem PRESetCLEANnel EXEQC Ule 2x E 155 SY NIHU les TRACe lt n gt DATA X B ie ry pp 276 TRIGger SEQuence DT IMe ront rrr ttr rera rene thee ag ra e ere nh dta Dna ee d 177 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 177 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDOoft 1 on rtt rennen eren trennen re ierant 177 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis esses neret nennt eene etre ane 178 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel I
5. n t Working with Spectrograms The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs You can define e Which colors to use Color scheme e Which value range to apply the color scheme to e How the colors are distributed within the value range i e where the focus of the vis ualization lies shape of the color curve The individual colors are assigned to the power levels automatically by the R amp S FSW The Color Scheme You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values Four different color ranges or schemes are available e Hot Uses a color range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low levels red colors indi cate high ones Q o a Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low levels blue colors indicate high ones The Cold color scheme is the inverse Hot color scheme e Radar TY Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between Dark colors indicate low levels light colors indicate high ones e Grayscale 10dBm Shows the results in shades of gray Dark gray indicates low levels light gray indi cates high ones The Value Range of the Color Map If the measured values only cover a small area in the spectrogram you can optimize the displayed value range so it becomes easier to distinguish between values that are close together and only parts of interest are display
6. 159 External Mixer B21 seessssssees 68 Threshold External Mixer B21 remote control 159 Threshold External Mixer B21 ss 68 Auto level Reference level 2 nre es SOMKOY C Auto Peak detector Auto Scalig EE Auto settings acd M 199 Measurement example Programming example 281 leg 186 Troubleshooting kees eire terns 145 Chirp rate horig ES 43 Chirp Rate Time Domain Result displays eicere aeternas 53 Chirp Results Table Result displays terret edt hte d ch 53 Chirp state arcu ES 43 Chirp states Auto detection eese ennt de nnns 60 BASICS m T 20 Ell BCEE 60 COMIQUIING ren E 58 Deleting Dete amp cting aiio ee b eie o ODE 21 Index 43 60 I ce 60 CVM 60 Eger 61 deine m 60 Chirp Statistics Table Result displays eere iter hk 53 Chirps Average frequency ssessesrcsicrerrsinerireeseisraarrisinerareanne 44 Average POWER ssseseeeeeeeneenneneem rennen 45 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 296 R amp S FSW K60 Index BASICS a OT Ee D WEE Detecting E Display ienn Anticon iene Evaluation basis 5 rennen enne Frequency Deviation Average a Frequency Dev
7. ssssssssss 168 Shifting values External Mixer B21 ES Values External Mixer B21 eseese Coupling Input remote EE 156 D Data acquisition st ovi npe 87 90 BASICS sends 15 Measurement time seesssseee 87 90 95 MSRA MSRT erento enne innen 86 183 Performing remote seesssesssssss 199 Record length Remote nonton teretes el Settings Softkey Data format Remote EE 278 Decimal separator Wace export uie trees 101 110 116 Default values IR eS 119 Demodulation Result displays erre i eu reete 45 Detectors ie Ip Remote control Spectrogram WACO EE Diagram footer information ssssssssssse 12 Display Configuration softkey sssssssessss 97 eu EE 11 Drop out time MAGEN deiis ct 84 Dwell time BASICS e X P 20 lp iir HE 1 40 E Electronic input attenuation 0 0 eee eee 76 77 Errors Jee RE ace sae ccatle ca ete eceen ten saat ec eerste eens Evaluation baslis creer eer EES Remoten Oc Selected hop chirp ir enin MR Evaluation methods Ee oc 207 Export format De r 286 Exporting ric eM EE 117 FEU CHONG oem 115 UO data Measurement settings seseeseeee 109 Table results essssesseseese 100 116
8. Conventions Used in the Documentation Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks 1 2 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 9 R amp S FSW K60 Welcome to the Transient Analysis Application Starting the Transient Analysis Application 2 Welcome to the Transient Analysis Applica tion The R amp S FSW K60 is a firmware application that adds functionality to detect transient signal effects to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW K60 features e Analysis of transient effects e Quick analysis even before measurement end due to online transfer of captured and measured UO data e Easy analysis of user defined regions within
9. sesseseeeeeeee 172 Configuration softkey ssseeeeee 74 Deviation T RESUS oeiia anneer nen arinaa ai Aes eaea enia 40 Frequency bandwidth Analysis regiOln o eror rete rtis 88 Frequency chirping CI Reuse 20 Frequency delta AE E 88 Frequency Deviation BU ccc 41 Frequency Deviation Time Domain Ixesult displayS a i rt rre tb t etes 50 Frequency hopping BASICS 18 s66 ASO HOPS se 18 Spectrogram L ee ee 75 Frequency results aln 2 44 Frequency Deviation eene 44 Measurement range ssssssen 24 91 Remote m FRESUIE displays terr hr rite erem 45 Frontend Configuratio E 61 Configuration remote ssseseeeeee 155 Full capture SEI le Re E 105 H Handover frequency External Mixer B21 remote control 160 External Mixer B21 ssesssssesess 65 Hardware settings Displayed EE 12 Harmonics Conversion loss table B21 a an 72 External Mixer B21 remote control 162 163 Order External Mixer B21 eeren 66 Type External Mixer B21 eeens 66 High pass filter cc M S 156 Digi 63 History ee e el 112 History Depth Ric M E 112 Hold Mace Setting EE 107 Hop detection COMMOUNING e
10. seeeeee 179 Impedance REMOS aaneren M HM 157 ctu M 62 Importing aUe pe C M 115 Input iore iic EE 61 Configuration remote ssseeeeeee 155 Coupling x Coupling remote erre 156 Overload remote neret 156 Ge EE 61 77 Source Configuration softkey 61 Source Configuration Softkey 61 Input sources Radio frequency E 62 Input Frontend ccv M 61 instalation P M 10 K Keys LINES riobUSed cerner een renda 55 MRR oee 118 MKR gt ssesssee 122 123 MKR FUNCT not used seseee 55 Peak Search we 123 RUNG CONT ccrte rerit erronee 94 113 RUNSINGLE err 94 95 113 L Length Analysis region seseseeeeeeeeeenene Measurement range x Result rarige i eroe tente Linking JE T 121 LO Level External Mixer B21 remote control 159 Level External Mixer B21 n se 67 Loading lee E 115 M Marker legend Displaying E 121 Marker search area Remote control teg teen hien 237 Marker table Evaluation method sese 52 Marker to Trace Ee 120 Markers Assigned le EE le EE Configuration remote control Configuration softkey ssssssss D activating n a cete oes Delta marker
11. sssssssssssssssseeeee nennen ennt entere tener nnne nnne DlSblav IlNDow nz LZOOMAREA enne enne nrn nitri irse nnns nnn r nnn inns senes enne nnn DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA esses eene tnis DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MUL Tiple zo0omzGTATe sse DlSblav IWlN Dow cnz L OOMGTATe eterne eterne entr eere terns ets s erre e nsi nnne nnn nns enne IBI Ve ei ree DISPIAY MTAB M DISPlayEWINDOWSRnP SELGGt iei rate ert eret tee ee rg rere ee Ye rede e EUR Eei DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO i FORMat DEXPort DSEP TEE FORMatDEXPott REI euder tert eret erre tr Eder ern es er np Dea EE ERR FORMatDEXPort TRAQGCGS iicet eere a Eae Fn rn aga eU Ego Re ie Ee ER PATERET Ut ge ma dh lee nrc eet lee REI E m INlrhtetechEEb eeh E INITiate SEQuencer ABORt e E INI Tiate SEQuencet IMMediate terrre e teet crecer re nc edet ha gne cue cud INITiate SEQuencer MODE D INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL 2 16onot au enter tnn eni enituit pereo dE ee lh d le Je IRE usi er ik degen BEE ll ng RESCUE Jl Tea RK ek AUT e WE INbPutATTenuattonPhOTec
12. n erieiee ener e eunte nnn an niihi ei nnne aaia 164 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 158 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Manual operation See Handover Freq on page 65 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts ETN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 160 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Configuring Transient Analysis Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 64 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 64 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave guide band Note Chan
13. percent of the hop dwell time Range 0 to 100 RST 100 CALC HOPD FREQ LENG 10 See Length on page 93 CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin time Defines the beginning of the measurement range for frequency results as an offset in seconds from the hop start This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 194 Parameters Time Example Example Manual operation Default unit S CALC HOPD FREQ OFFS BEG 3e 6 See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 See Offset Begin Offset End on page 93 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 193 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis SS SE J Hsu Configuring Transient Analysis CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet END Time Defines the end of the measurement range for frequency results as an offset in sec onds from the hop end This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 194 Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC HOPD FREQ OFFS END 3e 6 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283
14. 43 isdics Me ULIS 43 Ee re DEET 43 Dreams rn Tm 44 Frequency Deviation Peak cecinere tenes cnet rnk repere karta nn Rae 44 Frequency BeviationdEVIS cioe inira iinan Pe rede dea ccr a dct de xtd Pte a 44 Frequency Deviation AVerade cei cede return rti denken pl eher hes 44 Average p 45 State Index The nominal chirps are numbered consecutively in the Chirp States table see chap ter 6 3 2 Signal Detection Signal States on page 58 starting at O The state of a detected chirp is defined as the index of the corresponding nominal chirp frequency Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 265 SENSe CHIRp STATe on page 272 Chirp Begin Time offset from the analyis region start at which the signal first enters the tolerance area of a nominal chirp The tolerance area is defined by the settling tolerance above and below the defined nominal chirps Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 265 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin on page 273 Chirp Length The duration of a chirp from begin to end that is the time the signal remains in the tolerance area of a nominal chirp Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 265 SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth on page 274 Chirp Rate Derivative of the FM vs time trace within the frequency measurement range see chap t
15. essen 85 Frequency ne lO Measurement range 93 Reference level seb Result range 99 Options Electronic attenuation B25 ssssse 77 High pass filter B13 e K60C K60H Preamplifier B24 nre Output s tu EE 61 Configuration remote 155 171 Configuration softkey ssseeeeee 78 IF frequency remote 171 Noise source 18 Settings 2 0 pre AA 79 84 Overload RF input remote ice rere kt tree n Fen ei cu 156 Overview ere milenio E 56 P Parameters Chil Dt einna re eee pesi aped 42 DesctiptiOn s oa ioi oct ee ir retro edet 38 42 IEEE 181 Standard eee 38 42 Result display Eee ee teres 46 Retrieving remote T Table configuration c ccccccceeseeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeees 99 Peak EXCUPSION ep 123 Peak list PO AK OXCUPSION sirining iarria 123 Peak search Ky 123 Mode sirina iain aa 123 Mode spectrograms sssseeeee 122 Peaks Marker positioning sse 123 NOX Aten Aoi avin ola 124 SOMK CY ceret ree erre mites 123 Per division Ee 103 Performing Transient Analysis sssssee 127 Persistence spectrum edel TE TEE 33 Phase TT 104 PM Time Domain Result displays iii eite irt erre 51 PM Tim
16. H ENGth on page 197 Time Gate Start Analysis Region Defines the starting point of the time span for the analysis region The starting point is defined as a time offset from the capture start time Remote command CALCulate AR TIME STARt on page 198 Linked analysis bandwidth Analysis Region If activated the width of the frequency span for the analysis region is defined as a per centage of the full capture buffer It is centered around the point defined by the Delta Frequency Remote command CALCulate AR FREQuency PERCent on page 197 CALCulate AR FREQuency PERCent STATe on page 197 Linked analysis time span Analysis Region If activated the length of the time gate that is the duration or height of the analysis region is defined as a percentage of the full measurement time The time gate start is the start of the capture buffer plus an offset defined by the Time Gate Start Remote command CALCulate AR TIME CALCulate AR TIME hid ERCent on page 198 ERCent STATe on page 198 Hg Visualizing the Analysis Region Parameters Show Diagram Analysis Region If enabled the Data Acquisition Analysis Region dialog box shows a visualization of the parameters that define the analysis region as shown in figure 4 8 EI User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 88 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration r a Bandwidth Settings 6 7 Bandwidth Settings The bandwidth
17. Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 93 CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the frequency measurement range Setting parameters Reference CENTer EDGE EDGE The measurement range is defined in reference to the hop ris ing or falling edge see CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin on page 193 and CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet END on page 194 CENTer The measurement range is defined in reference to the center of the hop Example CALC HOPD FREQ REF CENTer Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Reference on page 92 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer LENGth Percent Defines the length of the measurement range in percent of the dwell time This com mand is only available if the reference is CENT see CALCulate HOPDetection POWer REFerence on page 195 Parameters Percent Example CALC HOPD POW LENG 2e 4 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Length on page 93 eM I User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 194 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 4 10 Configuring Transient Analysis CALCulate HOPDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin lt Time gt Defi
18. Text Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS Zen Manual operation See Comment on page 72 EN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 166 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Deg Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 73 SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168
19. This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON Manual operation See Range 1 2 on page 66 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high second range Parameters lt HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition Example MIX HARM HIGH 2 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 66 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type ES User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 162 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem A V TE STs Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD Manual operation See Harmonic Type on page 66 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 66 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH A
20. User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 62 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Input Output and Frontend Settings 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 157 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 156 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There
21. Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Range on page 104 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the Y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement Parameters for setting and query lt State gt OFF Switch the function off ON Switch the function on RST ON Manual operation See Automatic Grid Scaling on page 102 See Auto Scale Once on page 103 ST User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 219 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Analyzing Transient Effects DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for the selected result display Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 103 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for the selected result display Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0
22. For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 66 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 161 RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 164 Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band settings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 161 Mixer Type The R amp S FSW option B21 supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF data use the same port 9 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SENSe MIXer PORTs on page 164 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 65 ERREUR E I E E E e e e 1 L LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLX M User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 65 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration a a Input Output and Frontend Settings H
23. Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 201 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 201 EEUU RU EET EE RT e e e e A L L i eLALL L U U U ULULL User
24. Relative Scaling Reference per Division Define the scaling relative to a reference value with a specified value range per divi sion Per Division Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the value range to be displayed per division of the diagram 1 10 of total range Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision on page 220 Ref Position Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the position of the reference value in percent of the total y axis range Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 220 Ref Value Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue on page 221 IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 103 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis 7 2 4 7 3 Evaluation Basis Spectrogram y scaling For spectrograms the displayed y levels are defined as a range below the reference level Range Spectrogram y scaling Defines the full val
25. SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the RMS Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP ID lt QueryRange gt Returns the hop IDs from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP NUMBer lt QueryRange gt Returns the hop numbers from the Results table for the specified hop s IECH User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 260 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem S M I M sex Retrieving Results Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower lt QueryRange gt Returns the average power from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in
26. requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H All evaluation modes available for Transient Analysis are displayed in the selection bar in SmartGrid mode o For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual By default the Transient Analysis results are displayed in the following windows e RF Spectrum full capture buffer e FM Time Domain analysis region e Spectrogram full capture buffer e RF Power Time Domain analysis region If the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed the default result dis plays are e RE Spectrum full capture buffer e FM Time Domain analysis region e Spectrogram full capture buffer e Frequency Deviation Time Domain hop chirp e Hop Chirp Result Table analysis region The following evaluation methods are available for Transient Analysis RF SPOTU cS 47 SPOTO I D Em 47 RF Power Mme DOMAIN EE 48 FM Time DOMA ME 49 Frequency Deviation Time Domain 50 PM BK Tun EE 51 PM Time Domain Wrapped csset erano Leere eterne Lettere rnit ko bees 52 Markor TAD m 52 Chirp Rate Time OMAN E 53 Flop Chir Results Table dee anaa eM ete a nera aaa a aa aaa nne dug 53 Hop Chirp Statistics KEE 53 ERREUR RA I EE EE E S e A ALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLLLALAAAAAAAAAAAAALLLLLMLLLSSx User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 46 R amp S9FSW K60 Measurement Results a a P
27. 02 252 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis a Hu P CQ P Retrieving Results SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRT mode not for the MSRT Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range pretrigger time to min posttrigger time sweep time RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 85 11 9 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to query the results of the transient analysis Note that for each hop chirp result query you can specify for which hop chirp s you require results e ALL for all hops chirps detected in the entire measurement e CURRent for all hops chirps in the current capture buffer e SELected only for the currently selected hop chirp For each hop chirp result you can query either the current value default or the follow ing statistical values for the hops chirps detected in the capture buffer or the entire measurement e AVER average of the results e MIN minimum of the results e MAX maximum of the
28. Hop State No Index ID 1001 pts Meas BW 10 0 MHz Frame 0 Fig 4 18 Analysis line in R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual ERREUR A I TTE E RI S e e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUILLSIMSI User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 37 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results Hop Parameters 5 Measurement Results The data that was measured by the R amp S FSW can be evaluated using various different methods Basis of evaluation For some displays you can define whether the results are calculated for e the entire capture buffer e the selected analysis region e a selected individual chirp or hop for options R amp S FSW K60C K60H 1 Full Spectrogram 5 Region FM Time Domain LAP Clry 2 Hop 1 FM Deviation Time 1001 ptseet29 0 ps Fig 5 1 Example for different data sources for the same result display Spectrogram The data source for each result display is selected in the MEAS menu It is indicated in the description of the individual result displays For details on the analysis region see chapter 4 5 Analysis Region on page 22 Measurement range vs result range The measurement range defines which part of a hop chirp is used for calculation for example for frequency estimation whereas
29. Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 103 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Per Division on page 103 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid eM M PV M oc User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 220 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 7 Analyzing Transient Effects The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Parameters lt Position gt 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Ref Position on page 103 See Ref Level Position on page 104 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue Value This command defines the reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window Separate reference
30. State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF Reference This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 Parameters Reference 1 to 16 Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 YMMMMMMM O DM P n User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 234 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis RNC HH O P se Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 119 See Marker Type on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the
31. Table results remote Trace data eee re terere ener tdi pes Di ftam Traces remote External Mixer B21 eren 64 Activating remote control ssssss 158 Band SEED V elle LC ul Conversion loss Conversion loss tables sseeseessss 69 70 FREQUENCY range asce inscne ei oerte inet eeni Handover frequency Harmonic Order rrr een Ramone Type EE ET EE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 R amp S FSW K60 Index Programming example cccceeeeeeeeteeeteeteeeeeaees 169 RANG ities rm Restoring bands RF OVGMANGC i ebrei aee IRE StarU RE Stop icoueeeee irri ripe Serial number Duc ace External trigger l Gvel remote 5 irte lien 178 le 82 F FFT window functions se 90 scis 16 SDBCIIOGQEFalTl susce drin tert rie ER naa 90 File format ele nS 286 Filters High pass remote sssssseee 156 High pass RF input eene 63 YIG remote eret obtemperans 157 FM Time Domain Result displays FM video bandwidth Measurement example seen 137 FM Video Bandwidth s te ul EE 93 Format RER a EE 278 Frame count SE Le 17 Frames Spectrogram marker sse 119 Free Run Trigger SOTtKey sets cerneret terre ke EnEn 82 Frequency Configuration remote
32. UO Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual ET User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 117 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis Marker Settings 7 8 Marker Settings Marker settings can be configured via the MARKER key or in the Marker dialog box To display the Marker dialog box do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab e Individual Marker Setup TE 118 General Marker Setlings d tra eret eret er Pha Be es dR RE Era 120 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions esesssssss 122 7 8 14 Individual Marker Setup Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simult
33. eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenen enne nn nennen 30 49 Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode eene enn 35 5 Measurement Results eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eere nnne 38 5 1 Hop Parameters eee rre ent rrr tek ERR eu ER ENEE AER eEERARANNENRRRAT EE RRRERRRYRE ainaani EA 38 5 2 Chirp Parameters rore ux ER ERENNERT EENS EENEN 42 5 3 Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis eene n 45 6 e e UE me 55 6 1 Default Settings for Transient Analysis eeeeeeeeneneenennnnnnn n 55 6 2 Configuration Overview eeeeeseeeeeeeene eene nennen nnn nnne nnnm inn in tenni rien nnnn 56 6 3 Signal Descriptlon 2 iecit ren hesie true se en ko Eo Ee a a Rao RE Ya RRa umo Duk Aka n REA 58 6 4 Input Output and Frontend Settings seeeeeeennennennen n 61 GE Mt ve ET CET 80 6 6 Data Acquisition and Analysis Region eeeeenneeennenn nnn 86 6 7 Bandwidth Settinigs 5 ieiunii teu ete trek aln dera a Eso REP x RRa Resa RR ka nre Ru 89 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings eese enne 91 E User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 3 R amp S FSW K60 Contents 6 9 6 10 6 11 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 8 1 8 2 9 1 9 2 10 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 FM Video Bandwid
34. k lt chirp start chirp length Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 265 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm on page 270 Frequency Deviation RMS RMS of Frequency Deviation vs Time trace The deviation is calculated within the fre quency measurement range of the chirp see chapter 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 91 1 FMdev ms em FMerr k chirp start k lt chirp start chirp length Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 265 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm on page 270 Frequency Deviation Average Average of Frequency Deviation vs Time trace The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp see chapter 6 8 Hop Chirp Measure ment Settings on page 91 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 44 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis 1 fdevgyg mum FMerr k chirp start x k lt chirp start chirp length Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 265 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm on page 267 Average Power Average power level measured during a chirp Which part of the chirp precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration see chapter 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 91 Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RES
35. lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 119 See Marker Type on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt ES User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 232 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis El Analyzing Transient Effects Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 52 See Marker Position X value on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result y
36. rrr trenes 202 Activating remote ssssseen 202 Mode remole oreet reden 203 Dcus 201 Signal description CONGU EE 58 Signal detection E OD IEIDEIDEI EE 58 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 301 R amp S FSW K60 Index Signal ID External Mixer B21 remote control 159 External Mixer B21 cccscceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeess 68 Signal models BASICS M 18 Remote i Sellilig EE 58 Signal processing BASICS H A 15 Signal source ace MR 157 Single sweep cy E M 94 113 Elle Ee 124 Slope TAJGO E 84 179 Softkeys Amplitude Config center reet denne 75 Auto RRE 96 Capture Offset enee aeree 85 Center m Clear Spectrogram ssssseee Color Mappltig 1 ertet ette terrere Continue Single Sweep Continuous Sweep sssssseee Data acquisition i25 cree cnet eren tel et Display configuration EXPO CONO 2i nderit tete Ries Eteuel e Free Run sis Frequency Egger ee eed History Depth uicit reta eed iet e UO Power IF Power Input Source Config ssssssesseseees Input Frontend e jed i E RM Marker Contig ME Marker to Trace E Er Next Min rtt rhe aree reete Next Peak S Nortm D lt 2 5 terrre nennen rrr Outputs CONT EE P
37. 02 202 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis DEE Ee Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 204 Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential m
38. PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 242 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Il Analyzing Transient Effects Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the highest level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectro
39. RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect This command sets the focus on the selected result display window This window is then the active window Example DISP WIND1 SEL Sets the window 1 active Usage Setting only 11 6 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 154 Bereet EE 207 LAYout C ATal g WINBOW 9 iere rette t nto ee erre rh ce a ne 208 LAY OUTSIDE Nt WINDOW icri ai eaii a nade dead a 208 LAY ou REMoveE WINDOW ese usas a aa ENEE 209 LAYoutREPLace WINDOW ET 209 BN 209 IA Y out WINDOW SA gt gt Te EEN 211 LAYouEWINDawsmsIDENBS iose caeco etate ra ee S RED et np R cde tene RRdr ed ona p ecd aD Ren EA 211 LAY ourWiINDowsir E leede gea Sege lee EE 211 LAY Gu ee ir o ees tet tae Enc e eret dpa rao yon ain unes 212 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 206 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Analyzing Transient Effects LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction g
40. The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 204 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Analyzing Transient Effects 11 6 Analyzing Transient Effects The following commands are required to analyze transient effects in a measured sig nal e Configuring the Result Display eerte ren ee ances 205 e Defining the Evaluation Basls m m nt ec ere Renee 212 e Configuring the Result FRAG tesoeet etat dee geess RENDIR SEEN DER HK M hA REFS 213 e Selecting the HOD GEND EE 215 LEE le uroDris i 216 e Configuring the Y Axis Scaling and Unts cece ee ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeteae 219 ME tte ee 221 e Configuring SpectFOgEalis c verteret a eer Ev cc re t ER Erb d arua ek 225 Gonfounng Color E 229 e Working with Markers Eemotely 5 2 esee tercie evi edazec e eate erba ceo aede ead 231 e Zooming into the Display ciuis te crue ttr NEESS EENS 247 11 6 1 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen displ
41. This com mand is only available if a sweep count value is defined and the instrument is in single sweep mode Usage Query only Configuring Spectrograms The remote commands required for the individual settings available for spectrogram displays are described here For color mapping commands see chapter 11 6 9 Con figuring Color Maps on page 229 CALC Ulatesn S GRAm OL TE 225 CAL Culate nz SGGhRamlGbtCrooram EbRAMe GE ect 225 CAL Culate nz GGhRamlGbtCtrooram HDERO entren nennen enne 226 CAL Culate nz GGhRamlGbtCtrooram RE Goluton aannanniiannaaiida 226 CALOCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram RE Solution AUTO 226 CALOCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA sss enne 227 CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe sse 227 SENSe WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram DETector F UNCtion cessus 228 SENSe SWEep FFT WINDGw EENGUJI 22i aee a eee tae iet tei ted 228 SENSe SWEep FFT WINDOW TYBE ener Ree carente RR nn RR RR E Rhe Ren Ru 229 CALCulate n SGRam CLEar This command resets the spectrogram and clears the history buffer Usage Event Manual operation See Clear Spectrogram on page 112 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect Frame Time This command selects a specific frame for further analysis The command is available if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended T User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 2
42. User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 199 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Deeg Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL esses enne nennen tnnt rere rrr nn nnn nnne 202 IEN 202 INITiate SEQue ncerIMMedi te EENS E aAA E so rra Rd n eR ENEE ERR 202 INITiste SEQuenceR MODE ss 2 e acti ee eet as eene phia eee ore neqoe aa e cen AEEA EENE 203 TPN iS d EET 203 SYSTeNESEQUEDEBE EE 204 ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAI command after ABOR and before the next command To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INI Tiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 202 command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following co
43. amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S FSW K60 Contents Contents We PGE AGG c 7 1 4 Documentation Overview eese eee enne nnn nennen nin nn nent nnne nent nnn 7 1 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation eene nennen 8 2 Welcome to the Transient Analysis Application 10 2 4 Starting the Transient Analysis Application eee 10 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eeeeeeennennnnnnn 11 3 About Transient Analysis eere 14 4 Measurement Basics eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen nennen nnne nrnnnnnn 15 AA Data Aegutsitgn eene Beete ke errato d enean t bkn un aun een Don EN a eL E xu XR ENEE CER Aa 15 4 2 Ee EI E ue DEET 15 4 3 ECHTER OTT 18 4 4 Basis of Evaluatlon 5 ierit ttn tee tane eoo kenn nnn tain ete Lanka EENS nnmnnn 22 4 5 Analysis Reglori 1 ecce ceo oee incer eei eina rne ce itia EENEG deed EES eacus 22 4 6 Measurement Range ccccccccesssenecesseenseeeeseenseeeeseeeeseeseseaeseeesseeeesesesseansaeeeseeeseeeeeees 24 AT Trace EI ecoute trente nbn toten nan eoe aa danda Ck eda io ee Ya da nee Era nne ace 26 4 8 Working with Spectrograms
44. fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 157 6 4 1 2 External Mixer Settings The external mixer is configured in the External Mixer tab of the Input dialog box which is available when you do one of the following if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed e Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select the External Mixer Config softkey e From the Overview select Input then switch to the External Mixer tab under Input Source Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode For details on using external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual e Mixer SettnBs uere repe etri eene Ente ERE Ier HE ER ERE a FATE U ee FERRE aeaa 64 e BASIC OONN eyi aona 67 e Managing Conversion Loss Tables EEN 69 e Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Table 70 RETE RU RA I E Ee E e e e e e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUIAALZ 3 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 63 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Input Output and Frontend Settings Mixer Settings In this tab you configure the band and specific mixer settings Radio Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Band s Mixer Type RF Start Digital IQ RF Stop Handover Freq mm RF Overrange Mixer Settings Harmonic Type Range Harmonic Order Conversion Loss Elte E 65 PS
45. m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELOw 246 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT 246 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK 246 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOWVe 246 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 244 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis a ae Se es ee Analyzing Transient Effects CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELoOw 247 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT 247 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK 247 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame lt Time gt This command positions a delta marker on a particular frame The frame is relative to the position of marker 1 The command is available for the spectrogram Parameters lt Frame gt Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth lt Time gt Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 20 Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1 CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 2 s Sets fourth deltama
46. on page 281 Manual operation See Reference on page 92 YMO User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 191 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis RAM H H ee Se Configuring Transient Analysis CALCulate CHRDetection POWer LENGth lt Percent gt Defines the length of the measurement range for power results in percent of the chirp length This command is only available if the reference is CENT see CALCulate CHRDetection POWer REFerence on page 192 Parameters Percent percent of the chirp length Example CALC CHRD POW LENG 2e 4 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Manual operation See Length on page 93 CALCulate CHRDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin Time Defines the beginning of the measurement range for power results as an offset in sec onds from the chirp start This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate CHRDetection POWer REFerence on page 192 Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC CHRD POW OFFS 50 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 93 CALCulate CHRDetection POWer OFFSet END Time Defines the end of the measurement range for power results as an offset in seconds from the chirp end This command is only available if the
47. 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 182 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA or MSRT operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time off set between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 RETE RA I EE Ee E e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALALULTULLLLAR User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 85 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration H Data Acquisition and Analysis Region In MSRT mode the offset may be negative if a pretrigger time is defined Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 251 SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet on page 253 6 6 Data Acquisition and Analysis Region You must define how much and how data is captured from the input signal and which part of the captured data is to be analyzed For details see chapter 4 1 Data Acquisition on page
48. 3 2 Frequency Chirping on page 20 Settling Tolerance Chirp End Chirp Begin K Chirp Length Chirp Rate vs Time aS duu 2 Chirp Rate Hz us lt Nominal Chirp Rate Time s Fig 5 3 Definition of the main chirp parameters and characteristic values In order to obtain these results select the corresponding parameter in the result config uration see chapter 7 2 2 Table Configuration on page 99 or apply the required SCPI parameter to the remote command see chapter 11 6 5 Table Configuration on page 216 and chapter 11 9 1 Retrieving Information on Detected Hops on page 253 Chirp ID and Chirp number Each individual chirp can be identified by a timestamp which corresponds to the abso lute time the beginning of the chirp was detected In addition each chirp is provided with a consecutive number which starts at 1 for each new measurement This is useful to distinguish chirps in a measurement quickly Remote commands SENSe CHIRp ID on page 271 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 42 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results EG A O O Chirp Parameters SENSe CHIRp NUMBer on page 271 uper ep 43 CAWO i o m M 43 epo M
49. ALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLTACLLLUIXXSMM IJ User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 84 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration El Trigger Settings Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 181 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 181 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 182 Level Output Type lt Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 181 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 182 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger
50. Chirp Results Table on page 53 See Hop Chirp Statistics Table on page 53 For a detailed example see chapter 11 11 Programming Examples on page 280 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 207 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis b a a M M M lM Analyzing Transient Effects Table 11 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for Transient Analysis application Parameter value Window type SGR Spectrogram RFPTime RF Power Time Domain FMTime FM Time Domain FDEViation Frequency Deviation Time Domain PMTime PM Time Domain PMWRapped PM Time Domain Wrapped RFSPectrum RF Spectrum CRTime Chirp Rate Time Domain MTABle Marker table RTABle Results table STABle Statistics table requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows from top left to bot tom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syn tax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result Et zy tlt E Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LA
51. E k Ske t dwell ti FMdevyms 7 wma 2 FMerr k hop start lt k hop start dwell time Remote command CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 255 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm on page 260 Frequency Deviation Average Average of Frequency Deviation vs Time trace fdevgyg mee FMerr k hop start k x hop start dwell time dwell time Remote command CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 255 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm on page 257 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results Chirp Parameters Average Power Average power level measured during a hop Which part of the hop precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range settings see chapter 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 91 Remote command CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 255 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower on page 261 5 2 Chirp Parameters If the additional option R amp S FSW K60C is installed various chirp parameters can be determined during transient analysis The chirp parameters to be measured are very similar to the hop parameters however some values are based on the chirp rather than a frequency so the resulting unit is Hz us The following graphic illustrates the main chirp parameters and characteristic values For a definition of the values used to determine the measured chirp parameters see chapter 4
52. HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB EET E TET EE RT e e e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLILAULLUAX User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 169 Configuring Transient Analysis eege Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band LLL LT ES Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON n A E Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CORR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band SENS CO SENS CO R RR CVL BAND USER R SENS COR R R R CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO CVL MIX FS Z260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 A N A A A A Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR C
53. MAPK TERRE 119 Y Y axis CAIN EE Scaling remote YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eseeeeeeessee Activating Deactivating remote Z Zooming Activating remote sssssssee Analysis region i iue cese reed dece Area Multiple mode remote Cie Area remote 4 2 denen Deactivating EE Multiple mode Multiple mode remote Remote evt Restoring original display e Single Imode EE Single mode remote ssssssssss User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 303
54. MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak EM User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 237 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Analyzing Transient Effects The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 See Search Next Peak on page 124 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This comman
55. MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event EN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 239 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Analyzing Transient Effects Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 See Search Next Peak on page 124 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt
56. MU 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range O to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 124 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 124 See Restore Original Display on page 125 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 125 11 7 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 249 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only analysis interval The analysis line is a common tim
57. Manual mode you must define the time resolution in seconds Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution AUTO on page 226 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution on page 226 History Depth Sets the number of frames that the R amp S FSW stores in its memory If the memory is full the R amp S FSW deletes the oldest frames stored in the memory and replaces them with the new data Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram HDEPth on page 226 Time Stamp Activates and deactivates the time stamp The time stamp shows the system time while the measurement is running In single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped the time stamp shows the time and date of the end of the sweep When active the time stamp replaces the display of the frame number Remote command CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA on page 227 Color Mapping Opens the Color Map dialog Clear Spectrogram Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam CLEar on page 225 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 112 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis mI GC ew Spectrogram Settings Detector Defines the detector used to c
58. Manual 1175 6478 02 02 94 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration a nO w Sweep Settings Continue Single Sweep While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate CONMeas on page 200 Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA or MSRT applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate REFResh on page 201 Measurement Time The measurement time and Record Length are interdependent and define the amount of data to be captured The maximum measurement time in the R amp S FSW Transient application is limited only by the available memory memory limit reached message is shown in status bar Note however that increasing the measurement time and thus redu
59. Overview on page 56 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections MultiView SS Spectrum Transient Analysis 1 Ref Level 0 00 dBm Freq 993 0 MHz Meas Time 10ms Model Hog 10 48 Meas BW S0 0MHz SRate 100 0 MHz 3 Bypass 1 Full RF Time Domain 2 E 1 0 ms 2 Full Spectrogram MB Hop FM Error Time Domain CF 993 0 MHz 1001 pts Meas BW 80 0 MHz Frame P 0 78 220000432 us 1001 pts 9 97 ps 177 899999429 us Hop Results Hop Dwell Switching Avg Frequency Max FM RMS FM E Begin Time Time Frequency Deviation Deviation Deviation kHz Hop State ben ms ms ms kHz kHz kHz D Index 6 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA and MSRT operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored background of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA MSRT operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum
60. RESults on page 255 SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching on page 264 Average Frequency Average frequency measured within the frequency measurement range of the hop see chapter 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 91 Remote command CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 255 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency on page 258 Hop State Deviation Deviation of the hop frequency from the nominal hop state frequency EEUU RU RA I EE E E e e e A A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL ULLLLXSEI User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 40 Hop Parameters fdev Es fnom Where d Average hop frequency estimate obtained from the frequency meas range of a hop faom Nominal hop frequency corresponding to detected hop state Remote command CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 255 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror on page 257 Frequency Deviation Peak Maximum of Frequency Deviation vs Time trace The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp see chapter 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 91 max IFMerr DI if FMerr kmax 0 e beet Aert Ce FMerr kmax lt 0 hop start k lt hop start dwell time Remote command CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe RESults on page 255 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm on page 259 Frequency Deviation RMS RMS of Frequency Deviation vs Time trace 1
61. RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 211 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 2 Analyzing Transient Effects LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new
62. Rate The hop states are defined as frequency offsets from the center frequency Hops are only detected at these frequencies Chirp states are defined as a linear chirp rate Chirps are only detected at these chirp rates Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection STATes DATA on page 188 CALCulate HOPDetection STATes DATA on page 189 Tolerance A tolerance span can be defined to compensate for settling effects in the signal after switching the frequency As long as the deviation remains within the tolerance above or below the nominal frequency the signal state is detected Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection STATes DATA on page 188 CALCulate HOPDetection STATes DATA on page 189 Inserting a signal state Inserts an additional signal state before the currently selected state Deleting a signal state Deletes the currently selected signal state Clearing the signal state table Deletes all signal states in the signal state table Saving the signal state table Saves the current signal state table configuration EM User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 60 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Input Output and Frontend Settings Timing The dwell time is the time the signal remains in the tolerance area of a nominal hop frequency that is the duration of a hop from beginning to end A hop is only detected if its dwell time lies within the defined minimum and maximum values Auto Mode Timing If Auto Mode is enabled
63. SENSE HOP STATE MINIMUM Zairi dea tee pde nears cepe e ra dree dede ay eene dde aene 262 SENSe HOP STATe SDEViation iss SENSE HOR STATE ee SENSE HOP TIMM BEGin AVERage nne nnt nnne trennen trennen 263 IEN Ge HOP TI Ming BEGin MAximum nennen nennen nenne treten tenens 263 SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin MiNimum ener enne trennen tnnt nine 263 SENSe HOP TIMing BEGIMSDEVIAON enne 263 EIST lei GE Nu HEET 262 SENSE IiOp TiMimng DWELIAVERage nennen trennen tnter trennen inneren 263 ISENSGe IiOp TMimng DWELIMANimum nnne nenne tne treten tenete trennen 263 IEN Ge IHOp T lMimg DELT MiNlmum nennen nennen nri trtr inris 263 SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI SDEVIAtON T trennen nnne 263 SENS HOP TIMMY DWEL KEE 263 SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching AVERage 2 essen rennen ener nnne 264 SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching MAXimum sessi nnne trennen nnns 264 SENSe HOP TIMing SWIT ching MiNimum nennen tnnt entretenir nnn 264 SENSe HOP TIMing SWlITching SDEViation essent 264 SENSe HOP TIMirig SWITCHING sists cierra eter tret rers re eere te ceca rete te Ee eR d 264 SENSe MEASure POINIS n eiie etienne da aeea ekanda eve ied ee eden dog 224 SET bae m senesced 158 SENSE MiXer BIAS COW D 158 IEN Ge Mixer tREOuencv HANDover nennen nennt rennneen rre n rns arada se tenentes nns 160 IENGe Mixer FREOuencv STAR 160 S
64. SaM be x 2 112 evo C 112 Gledi SPSCUO ORAM ss ET 112 DGS GIOR E M 113 Continuous Sweep RUN Ke oC KREE 113 Single Sweep RUN GINGLE A 113 Selecting a frame to display Selects a specific frame loads the corresponding trace from the memory and displays itin the Spectrum window Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 111 R amp S9FSW K60 Analysis EGG A H eei Spectrogram Settings This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped and only if a spectrogram is selected The most recent frame is number 0 all previous frames have a negative number For more information see chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 15 Remote command CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 225 Time Resolution The time resolution determines the size of the bins used for each FFT calculation The shorter the time span used for each FFT the shorter the resulting span and thus the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes In Auto mode the optimal resolution is determined automatically according to the data acquisition settings In
65. Signal Model The signal model defines which type of signal to expect if known thus determining the analysis method These settings are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed ISENS amp ISIGNAEMO UB l 5 5 2 eee eat eee tea ere ew eese saa eere REI predi uber e RENDERE RE 186 EEREERETITTELEE E E E E SSS User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 185 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 4 8 Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe SIGNal MODel lt Signal gt Defines which type of signal to expect if known thus determining the analysis method This command is only required if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed Parameters lt Signal gt HOP CHIRp NONE HOP Signals hop between random carrier frequencies in short inter vals CHIRp The carrier frequency is either increased or decreased linearly over time NONE No specific signal model is used this is the default setting if no additional options are installed Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Hop Model Chirp Model on page 58 Configuring Signal Detection The signal detection settings define the conditions under which a hop chirp is detected within the input signal The
66. Source In Generator 1 LF Generator 2 Deviation 40 000 MHz 8 000 HR Ratio FM 2 1 0 02 Mode Normal hape Trapezoid x Sine requency 2 500 00 kHz ll 25 000 o kHz eriod 400 00 us z 40 00 us Fig 9 8 R amp S SMF frequency modulation configuration for chirped FM signal example Settings in the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application To detect chirps in an FM signal 1 Preset the R amp S FSW Set the center frequency to 4 GHz Set the reference level to 30 dBm Select the MODE key and then the Transient Analysis button Select Signal Description gt Signal Model and select the signal model Chirp Set the measurement time to 7 ms Set the measurement bandwidth to 160 MHz o NM o mF o wm Define an analysis region to extract the chirped FM signal Make sure that a suffi cient number of chirps are inside the analysis region LEE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 139 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Example Chirped FM Signal 1 Magnitude Capture Frequency Time Gate Show Diagram Delta 0 0 Hz EEG REI 100 0 MHz EET 1 0 ms off 0 0s 1001 pts 100 0 us 2 Full Spectrogram D Fig 9 9 Configuring an analysis region for a chirped FM signal a From the Meas Config menu select Analysis Region Config b Define the starting point of the frequency range as an offset from the center fre quency Delta c Define the width of the
67. Suffixes COMMON p 151 Remote commands seen 148 Sweep ADOMING iacente teretes DOUD Performing remote S ltlillgs ime e ere rear e He Ee Switching time bcr qe P 40 Symbol rate MSRA MSRT mode seen 35 T Tables Configuration eS 99 Configuration remote sese 216 Exporting p 100 101 115 116 Time domain results Result displays suero neret e tee ROREM 45 Time frames Navigating EE 32 imm 95 111 eeler 32 Time gate Analysis TEGION e nua aaie 88 Time stamps Softkey Spectrogram seeseeessss 112 SpectrograM Siinses ind ie aiei eaii 112 Trace averaging Measurement example sse 142 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 R amp S FSW K60 Index Trace POMS siiicar irens retire inre 108 Traces BASICS H N 26 Configuration Softkey sssssssssssss 105 Configuring remote control essssuss 221 Detector Detector remote control seessess 223 Exportformat 22 cie ete 101 110 116 Exporting 108 109 110 117 133 Exporting results remote ssssssss 278 Hold Mode D Mode remote EE 221 Retrieving remote sess 275 Selecting i Settings Settings remote control sssssssusss 22
68. The carrier frequency is either increased or decreased linearly over time Remote command SENSe SIGNal MODel on page 186 Signal Detection Signal States The signal detection settings define the conditions under which a hop chirp is detected within the input signal These settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed LE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 58 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration m n aM Signal Description The nominal frequencies or chirps the signal is expected to switch to are defined in advance in the Signal State table Each possible frequency chirp is considered to be a hop statelchirp state The Signal State table is available when you do one of the following e From the Overview select Measurement then switch to the Signal Detection tab e From the MEAS CONFIG menu select Hop Chirp Detection Config Signal Model Analysis Region Signal Detection Demod Config Signal States Frequency Power Hop States Number of hop states 1 Auto Mode Frequency Tolerance 159 92800 kHz 959 84500 kHz Timing Auto Mode Min Dwell Time Max Dwell Time For details on the individual parameters see chapter 4 3 1 Frequency Hopping on page 18 Auto MOTS einni 60 Hopi Ghi State INdGX iiec eom TEE R 60 Fre
69. a video filter 1 Disable trace averaging for the Frequency Deviation Time Domain display a Press the TRACE key then select Trace Config b Fortrace 1 select the Mode C r Write c Fortrace 2 and 3 select the Mode Blank From the Bandwidth menu select FM Video Bandwidth As the FM Video Bandwidth select Low Pass 196 BW Note the different behavior of limiting the noise bandwidth by VBW filtering and trace averaging E User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 143 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Blurred spike Clear shape of smooth nonlinearity without VBW filter averaging artifact Fig 9 14 Chirp Frequency Deviation clear write trace with 1 VBW filter Clear shape of spike Residual Noise on Average Trace Statistic Count 1000 UT D WE ACHEN AH a wee Wa Fig 9 15 Chirp Frequency Deviation average trace statistic count 1000 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 144 R amp S FSW K60 Optimizing and Troubleshooting 10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting If the results do not meet your expectations or if problems occur during measurement try the following solutions Too many hop chirp states have been detected in auto mode 145 The desired hop chirp states are not detected sssessssssssssss 145 Instead of one hop chirp several shorter hop chirps of the same hop chirp state are e MEER 145 Instead of one hop chirp seve
70. are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB IECH User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 66 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Input Output and Frontend Settings Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list Pre defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for compatibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Managing Conversion Loss Tables tab For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 70 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 164 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 163 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 163 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 163 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Blas Settings Range 1 LO Level nsa NS Signal ID Digital IQ Bias Settings Range 2 Auto ID Bias Value LITCBURIETIET TUE 10 0 dB Eh Ale TEEN 68 L Write to CVL table NaMe gt c ccccccscccesesc
71. by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory of the instrument E User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 73 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration aS SS I IG NM E RESRS ERN AUR NUNNURTRUSNNSNNIT Input Output and Frontend Settings 6 4 2 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey e Select the Frequency tab in the Input Settings dialog box Frequency Center 325GH2 25 GHz Center Frequ JENC Stepsize VIER 1 0 MHz Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz Center MEQUON e EENNen 74 Center E ET 74 Freguenoy OMSET Em 75 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer
72. can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs on page 168 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair select the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the frequency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 167 Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position value entry Shift x Shifts all positions in the table
73. ced Lee e nies ev ee eddie ie eect 273 Ei Lie ME REI E KE 273 SENSe CHIRG TIMMY BEGM EE 273 SENS CHIRe TIMing BEGIN AVERAGG deERRi SSES AER 273 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGInIMAXMIMUN 2 25 ciel Rees rte eee EES 273 ISENGe ICHIRp TlMing BEGin MiNimum nnns 273 Ee ell a Mel NEE RRE 273 ISENSeICHlRp TlMing L ENG 274 SENSe CHIRp TIMing EENGIh AVERAage aeeitenricu enini tinta inadai 274 SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth MAXiMUM eene enne nennen nnne 274 SENSe JCHIRBEFIMInS EENGCIFEMUNIBIERO re 2cucu eua uua n cao d t rtt ep neun exo iia 274 SENSe amp ICHIRp TIMiDng EENGIth SDEVIaAtlOn oce eterne SEN EES exert rt iaa E EERS 274 IGENSeICHlRp TIMingbRATE ttes tona 274 SENSe JCHIRBETFIMInS RATE AVERGBGe ctt nn Letto eee d ee nk ecu na eR cache rat 275 SENSe CHIRG T IMing RATE MAXIMUM ENNEN ath aste a ENN 275 SENSeJCHIRGTIMIngE RA TE MINIMUM Z a soutenir nni iaaii 275 SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE SDEViation cessisse rennen 275 CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults lt Start gt lt End gt This command queries the chirp results table The result is a comma separated list of value sets one set for each chirp If no query parameters are specified the results for all detected chirps are returned R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis SS SSS a ee PH Qu Retrieving Results Which values are returned depends on the enabled parameters for the res
74. chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp ID lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp IDs from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp NUMBer lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp numbers from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower lt QueryRange gt Returns the average power from the Results table for the specified chirp s T User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 271 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis b M I Retrieving Results Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Average Power on page 45 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns
75. command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1 amp 9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 148 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form EMN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 150 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Com
76. default useful dwell time chirp length limits for the current measurement are defined automatically Otherwise the manually defined Minimum Maximum values apply Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection LENGth AUTO on page 186 CALCulate HOPDetection DWEL1 AUTO on page 188 Minimum Maximum Timing If Auto Mode is disabled you can define minimum or maximum dwell times or both manually in order to detect only specific hops for example Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection LENGth MAXimum on page 187 CALCulate CHRDetection LENGth MINimum on page 187 CALCulate HOPDetection DWELl MAXimum on page 188 CALCulate HOPDetection DWEL1 MINimum on page 189 Co F a Co h D 6 4 Input Output and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can evaluate signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e l put sells cene eee rere ERE HE nete ir ORE eet Rei eeu aa EEE aes 61 e Erequericy dt CET 74 e Amplitude SeIlgs rice Ee Eed 75 e Qutput Settings eerren inaran rnnt Rent iR nh Enea ear ER Re Lh Ra 78 6 4 4 Input Settings Input settings can be configured by doing one of the following e Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select Input Source Config e Inthe Overview select Input Frontend Some settings are also available in the Amplitude ta
77. display is indicated in table 5 1 Detected hops chirps are indicated by green bars along the x axis in graphical result displays The selected hop chirp see Select Hop Select Chirp on page 105 is indi cated by a blue bar Analysis Region The analysis region determines which of the captured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen By default the entire capture buffer data is defined as the analysis region However you can select a specific frequency and time region which is of inter est for analysis The results can then be restricted to this region see chapter 7 3 Evaluation Basis on page 104 Note however that only one analysis region can be defined All result displays that are restricted to the analysis region thus have the same data basis SS SST User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 22 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics Analysis Region Numeric results displayed in the result or statistics tables are always calculated based on the analysis region For graphical result displays based on the analysis region the x axis range corre sponds to the analysis region length see Time Gate Length on page 88 The analysis region is indicated by a yellow frame in the Full Spectrogram display A Full Spectrogram CF 13 25 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 320 0 MHz Frame 0 Defining the analysis region There are two different methods of defining the analysis region e absolute definition by defining an absolu
78. enne rennen senes 235 CAI Culatesn DELTamarkersm Y isses eii a aag aiaiai piov Aaa eana a ae D 236 CALCulate cnz DEI TamarkermztSTATel nennen nnn nnn nen tnns snnt ness t ennt e rnnt nenne 234 CAlLCulate nz DEI Tamarker m1z LINK OMAR erem 234 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer LINK a CALCulate cnzMAbRker PE vCursion seen EAEN E nnn n tns s LNA RENEE RENEE EEREN NE 237 CALCulate n MARKer SGRam SPECtrogram SARea sesenta 242 CALCulatecnz MAbRkercmz AOEE A 232 CAL Culate cnz MAh ker mz MAvimum LEET 237 N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 292 R amp S FSW K60 List of Commands CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT m CAlCulate cnzMAbRkerzmz MAximum RI CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK esses eene nennen nennen nnns n rnnr ene nnes nenne CAL Culate nzMAbRkerzmz MiNmumlEFT nennen neret eren neret senes CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT sess nene eene nen nneenret reset rnse trennen nnns CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt scene nnne nreenren rennen neret CALCulate n MARKer m MlINimumy PEAK esee ere nerenren nnns CALCulate n2 MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe sse enne CAL Culate cnzMAh kercmz GGbamlGbtCrooram XZ MAXimumf PDEART CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK a CALCulate n2 MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWe
79. for the Chirp States to Off C Select the Tolerance for the state index 0 and enter 200 kHz To analyze FM linearity For radar systems using chirped FM signals FM linearity is an important measure ment User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 141 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Example Chirped FM Signal The FM Time Domain and the Frequency Deviation Time Domain displays are useful to investigate interference of the chirp FM 1 Magnitude Capture ei Clrw 0 0s 1001 pts 100 0 us 3 Chirp Results 4 Region FM Time Domain ds Chirp State Hays Length R m kH 1 4 10 0 s 1001 pts 100 0 us 1 0 ms 2 Region Spectrogram HSRegion FM Error Time Domain 1 Clrw 7 Y 1001pts Meas BW 100 0 MHz Frame amp 0 0 0s 100 0 us Fig 9 12 Typical display arrangement for FM linearity measurement The Frequency Deviation display is dominated by noise but a spike in the up chirp is already clearly visible this spike caused the up chirp to be detected as two individual chirps To remove noise using trace averaging Noise can be removed by averaging the Frequency Deviation Time Domain trace over multiple chirps 1 To restrict trace statistics to the up chirp discard all down chirps by deleting the corresponding chirp state from the chirp state list a From the Meas Config menu select Signal Description Signal States b Select the state index 1 c Select Delete 2 Restrict the Frequency De
80. for the peak level for all frequencies and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event Using Delta Markers The following commands control spectrogram delta markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the delta markers CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 239 zZ CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 239 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 240 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 240 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 240 zZ CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 240 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 240 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 241 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz GGbamlSbtcCiooram ERAMe 245 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram SARea esee 245 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK 245 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK 245 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWVe 246 CALOCulate n DELTamarker
81. frequency range as a Bandwidth Be sure to include several chirps in the frequency range d Define the starting point and the length of the time gate Again be sure to include several chirps in the time gate 9 The chirps are detected automatically The detected chirp states are listed in the order of their occurrence in the Chirp Detection Config dialog box From the Meas Config menu select Chirp Detection Config to check them User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 140 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Example Chirped FM Signal Signal States Frequency Power Chirp States Number of chirp states 2 Auto Mode On Tolerance 799 64100 kHz 32 20600 kHz 798 42100 kHz 26 15300 kHz Timing Auto Mode Min Chirp Length Max Chirp Length Fig 9 10 Detected chirp states To analyze the chirp results All detected chirps are indicated in the Results Table 3 Chirp Results Chirp State Chirp Chirp Chirp Chirp Rate Avg Max FM RMS FM ID N F Inde Begin Length Rate Deviation Frequency Deviation Deviation DT ms Wun kHz us kHz us kHz kHz kHz 0 0 1 s 1 Fig 9 11 Detected chirps Note that the up chirp is split up into two smaller chirps for some reason P Increase the detection tolerance for the up chirp and note the impact on the detec ted chirp length in the Results Table a From the Meas Config menu select Signal Description Signal States b Set the Auto Mode
82. in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see TNITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 202 the mode is only con sidered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 94 INITiate IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 94 INITiate REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA MSRT mode not the MSRA MSRT Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged er YMMMMMM M M MM User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 201 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis DEE Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OF
83. input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increases the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 173 RF Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 is not available mechanical attenuation is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB also using the rotary knob Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed EEUU RU EA E E E E e e e e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUUILUUULZIZZL SI User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 76 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration i S Input Output and Frontend Settings NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the p
84. interdependent see SENSe RLENgth on page 184 Parameters lt MeasTime gt Range 18 75 us to 1 298 ms RST 350 us Default unit S Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Measurement Time on page 87 SENSe RLENgth lt SampleCount gt This command defines the record length in samples for the current measurement Note that the record length and the measurement time are interdependent see SENSe MTIMe on page 184 Parameters lt SampleCount gt The maximum record length is limited only by the available memory RST 140000 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Record Length on page 87 SENSe SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command defines the sample rate for the current measurement Note that the sample rate and the measurement bandwidth are interdependent see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 183 For information on supported sample rates and bandwidths see the data sheet Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 100 Hz to depends on installed options RST maximum allowed Example SRATe 1
85. is 0 Hz Note In MSRA MSRT mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Mas ter Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 172 6 4 3 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings affect the signal power or error levels To configure the amplitude settings do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview then switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey plitude VARA B m J Amplitude Scale Unit Reference Level Input Settings E Value 10 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Impedance RF Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode Value 20 0 dB Value unit settings D Note that amplitude settings are not window specific as opposed to the scaling and Reference Ibevel cesserit bur edat uw ctt et eiae eut cede e ert sede ette ere 76 L Shifting ie Display SN soper Seeerei Ers 76 FRE AOU DRITTE DT TT TIMIDI 76 L Attenuation Mode Value centem tnnt nets 76 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 75 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration mLA E UemeeEEeoi Y c Input Output and Frontend Settings Using Electronic Attenuation Option B35l eccseeeeeeetneeee eee eeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaa 77 HEUSE UNOS EE 77 L Preamplifier option B34 entere tnnt tttsrar stans
86. nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum HIGH CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmumt PDEART enne ener tnter CAlLCulate nz DEL Tamarker mz MbREF sess nene eee nnnnennretr enn rts een nnn snnt rers enne s enn rnnn sena CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe TA CAlLCulate nz DEL Tamarker cmz GGbamlGbtCtrooram GAbea CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram XY MAximumf PDEART na 245 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram XY MlINimum PEAK eese 245 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWe sees 246 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELOw sese 246 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT seen 246 CAlLCulate nz DEL Tamarker mz GGbamlGbtCtrogoram v MAimumf PDEART 246 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MiNimumNENT eeren CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK esee CALCulate n DELTamarker m TRAQCe sse eene ennt entres th nnnns retentis enters ssa n nnne CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tami rkersmmo X aate eene tendent rene rete S A aN ebat Ee REX ARESE EERIE ENAA 235 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker cmz SREL ative eene
87. operation See Hold on page 107 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 106 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 108 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Parameters Detector APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak SAMPIe First value detected per trace point RMS RMS value AVERage Average RST APEak I Q Analyzer RMS Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 223 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis b M i Analyzing Transient Effects SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 107 SENSe MEASure POINts lt MeasurementPoints gt Defines the maximum number of trace points within a trace Parameters lt MeasurementPoints gt Manual operation See Maximum number of trace
88. range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 69 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 165 Managing Conversion Loss Tables In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cvl direc tory are listed in the Modify Tables list Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Digital IQ WIVUALII 69 ise KT NETTE RE 70 RTE e CIO I LT 70 Import TANGY e 70 New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 70 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 69 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration i 8 Input Output and Frontend Settings Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit t
89. reference is EDGE see CALCulate CHRDetection POWer REFerence on page 192 Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC CHRD POW OFFS 50 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 93 CALCulate CHRDetection POWer REFerence Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the power measurement range YY MJ M PPP R mw User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 192 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Setting parameters lt Reference gt Example Example Manual operation Configuring Transient Analysis CENTer EDGE EDGE The measurement range for power results is defined in refer ence to the chirp s rising or falling edge see CALCulate CHRDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin on page 192 and CALCulate CHRDetection POWer OFFSet END on page 192 CENTer The measurement range is defined in reference to the center of the chirp CALC CHRD POW REF EDGE See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 See Reference on page 92 CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency LENGth Percent Defines the length of the measurement range for frequency results in percent of the hop s dwell time This command is only available if the reference is CENT see CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 194 Parameters Percent Example Manual operation
90. results for all traces and tables in all windows use the Export Trace to ASCII File command in the Save Recall Export menu See also chapter 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 108 Note Secure user mode I User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 115 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis ee GNO mng Export Functions In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe on page 277 Table Export Configuration Table results can be exported to an ASCII file for further evaluation in other external applications Table export settings can be configured in the Result Configuration dia log box in the Table configuration tab in the vertical Table Export tab The settings are window specific and only available for result tables Columns to Export Table Export Configuration Defines which of the result table columns are to be included in the export file Visible Only the currently
91. some basic functions and mea surement tasks assuming the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed e Example Hopped FM SIQnal ciccnsscccvccchscccaccesasneceauetteasccvcnsaasacaeassonadeccchteaaenvaeaancen 134 e Example Chirped FM Signal esses emere nennen 138 9 1 Example Hopped FM Signal A practical example for a basic transient analysis measurement is provided here It demonstrates how to identify a hopped signal how to detect hops and how to analyze an individual hop The measurement is performed using the following devices e An R amp S FSW with application firmware R amp S FSW K60 Transient Analysis K60H Hopped Transient Analysis and bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 e A vector signal generator e g R amp S SMBV100A Fig 9 1 Test setup Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMBV100A Frequency 4 GHz Level 30 dBm Channels CW Hopping channel 0 dB DC carrier 20 dB Hops 20 0 20 2 20 4 20 6 20 8 21 0 MHz Dwell time 200 us Sample rate 100 MHz Settings in the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application To identify a hopped FM signal 1 Preset the R amp S FSW 2 Setthe center frequency to 4 GHz 3 Set the reference level to 30 dBm N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 134 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Example Hopped FM Signal Select the MODE key and then the Transient Analysis button Select t
92. sse 228 SENSe JADJust LEVel nennen enne nenne nhe nnne nnne nne nn serene nennen enne tenete etes enne nnne 199 IEN Ge IGANDwicdtblGwlDtb DEMod enne rre nrtn rennen enne 183 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow n RATiO esee mener 185 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow n RESolution eene 185 IEN Ge ICHibp FbREOuencv AVGEm AVERage nennen nnne trennen 268 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm MAXimum SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm MiNimum nennen eene nnne 268 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm SDEViation essent 268 SENS CHIRP FREQUEN V AVGE M iinne deseri eden eret aaa ia ace aiaia sen de Ma enean abdo cuu 267 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror AVERage essen rennen eren rennen nennen 268 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror MAXiIMUM nennen nre nne enneeennr etr enne 268 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror MINimum essere nennen rennen 269 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror SDEViation 269 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERTOr incierto eo tnt n tne tp nodo nori RE ense nana etie ER nnt 268 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency AVERQge eene enne eret ennn nne 269 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency MAXimum eese rennen nennen neret 269 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency MlINimum esee ener 269 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency SDEViation nennen 269 IGENZGe ICHiRpo FbREOuencv FRE Ouencyd nennen nren nennen neret eret nrs eere etes tren
93. standard spectrum display Since the signal does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e vertically The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent Result display The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements 1Rm AvgLlog Spon 1 9 GHz 110 0 dBm 5 10 0 dBm O rame 50 Marker CAE E E Function Result 1 Fig 4 13 Screen layout of the spectrogram result display 1 Spectrum result display 2 Spectrogram result display 3 Current frame indicator 4 Time stamp frame number User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 31 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 4 8 1 4 8 2 Working with Spectrograms 5 Color map 6 Marker 7 Delta marker 8 Marker list Time Frames The time information in the spectrogram is displayed vertically along the y axis Each line or trace of the y axis represents one or more captured sweeps and is called a time frame or simply frame As with standard spectrum traces several measured values are combined in one sweep point using the selected detector Frames are sorted in chronological order beginning with the most recently recorded frame at the top of the diagram frame number 0 With the next sweep the previous frame is moved further down in the diagram until the maximum number of captured frames is reached The display is updated continuously during the measurement and t
94. sweep data cap turing Parameters lt Offset gt RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 84 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword MMMMMMMMMMMM O 1 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 177 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem m u M PER N Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 84 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 84 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trig
95. the captured data e Analysis of frequency hopping or chirped FM signals with additional Transient Analysis options This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the Transient Analysis Application The Transient Analysis application adds a new application to the R amp S FSW To activate the Transient Analysis application 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the Transient Analysis item Transient Analysis The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the Transient Analysis application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the Transient Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Over User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 10 R amp S FSW K60 Welcome to the Transient Analysis Application Understanding the Display Information view softkey from any menu see chapter 6 2 Configuration
96. the color scheme for the spectrogram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor STYLe on page 230 Auto Defines the color range automatically according to the existing measured values for optimized display Set to Default Sets the color mapping to the default settings Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor DEFault on page 229 Export Functions The following export functions are available via softkeys in the Export menu which is displayed when you select the Save icon in the toolbar and then Export d The standard data management functions e g saving or loading instrument settings that are available for all R amp S FSW applications are not described here See the R amp S FSW User Manual for a description of the standard functions Export Table tO ET ioi nee acte AANER Ren nba E Mene nde du xe Enea dn 115 Table Export ee Te e EE 116 L Columns to EXport cias than ated taa reiten a a 116 L Decimal Sepatelot csse riora mera a recs eec 116 L Export Table to ASCII File 116 Export Trace to ASCII FIG rite erre ore ien Rene ER eue tee eene SEN e 117 Trace Export Configufatlgh Nee EENS 117 Huc M M M 117 Export Table to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected result table in ASCII format DAT to the specified file and directory Note To store the measurement
97. the lowest value you want to include in the color mapping 2 Select and drag the top color curve slider indicated by a gray box at the right of the color curve pane to the highest value you want to include in the color mapping i nn 1 1 i 110dBm 80dBm 60dBm 40dBm 10dBm To set the value range numerically 1 In the Start field enter the percentage from the left border of the histogram that marks the beginning of the value range 2 In the Stop field enter the percentage from the right border of the histogram that marks the end of the value range L User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 131 R amp S FSW K60 How to Perform Transient Analysis DEE How to Configure the Color Mapping Example The color map starts at 100 dBm and ends at 0 dBm i e a range of 100 dB In order to suppress the noise you only want the color map to start at 90 dBm Thus you enter 10 in the Start field The R amp S FSW shifts the start point 10 to the right to 90 dBm CH Adjusting the reference level and level range Note that changing the reference level and level range of the measurement also affects the color mapping in the spectrogram Editing the shape of the color curve The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map By default the color curve is linear i e the colors on the color map are distributed evenly If you shift the curve to the left or right the distribution be
98. the result range determines which data is displayed on the screen in the form of AM FM or PM vs time traces Exporting Table Results to an ASCII File Measurement result tables can be exported to an ASCII file for further evaluation in other external applications For step by step instructions on how to export a table see chapter 8 2 How to Export Table Data on page 133 Hop EE 38 CHp Paramete Soene en e tad gestu dvd iaa EE 42 e Evaluation Methods for Transient Analyse 45 5 1 Hop Parameters If the R amp S FSW K60H option is installed various hop parameters can be determined during transient analysis ERREUR EE E EE E e S e LL A ALLLLLLLILIIL User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 38 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results mE d aes Hop Parameters The hop parameters to be measured are based primarily on the IEEE 181 Standard 181 2003 For detailed descriptions refer to the standard documentation IEEE Stand ard on Transitions hops and Related Waveforms from the IEEE Instrumentation and Measurement I amp M Society 7 July 2003 The following graphic illustrates the main hop parameters and characteristic values For a definition of the values used to determine the measured hop parameters see chapter 4 3 1 Frequency Hopping on page 18 Settling Tolerance FM vs Time d Hop End Hop Begin Y Switching Time Dwell Time Freq
99. to Export Visible AM Fable Deamal Separator Export Export Table to ASCII File The result tables can be exported either directly in the settings dialog box or via the Export function in the Save Recall menu via the toolbar Columns 10 EX aire Ee ea Daten ss ede en aha aee ch De SENAT 101 Decimal Sepalralor oen derent tte ent dee n dea Ce eR eee x YR Yan ENDE dewadsdeaseeusadesnuancases 101 Export Table to ASCI File eterna et ro mune eR nh RR ardada Kar e e renun 101 Columns to Export Defines which of the result table columns are to be included in the export file Visible Only the currently visible columns in the result display are exported All All columns including currently hidden ones for the result display are exported Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe on page 277 Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 278 Export Table to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected result table in ASCII format DAT to the specified file and directory Note To store the measurement results for all traces and tables in all windows use the Export Trace to ASCII File command in the Save Recall gt Export menu See also chapter 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration on pag
100. values are maintained for the various displays Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT Default unit dBm Manual operation See Ref Value on page 103 Configuring Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed in the window Depending on the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed BISPlayTWINDowsns FRACest MODI 212 aiii apaia nece extent eerte ranae 221 DiSblavJhWiNDow nz TTR ACectMODE HCOhNtnuous nennen 222 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe essere rere 223 SENSe WINDow n DETector trace FUNCtion sess 223 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO cesses 224 E LEET e 224 SENSES TATisti EY E EE 224 SENSe SWEep COUNL ertt ttt tn ttt titt te tet tetas ta tat tanta de ado ti 224 SENSeTSWEem COUNEGCURRri E 225 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode L User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 221 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Parameters lt Mode gt Example Manual operation Analyzing Transient Effects WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over s
101. with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads gt Firmware 1 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 2 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 8 R amp S FSW K60 Preface a
102. 00M MULTiple zoom AREA on page 248 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 248 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 249 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 248 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 249 for each multiple zoom window 7 10 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode The data that was captured by the MSRA MSRT Master can be analyzed in the Transi ent Analysis application The analysis settings and functions available in MSRA MSRT mode are those descri bed for common Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Analysis line settings In addition an analysis line can be positioned The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA MSRT applications To hide or show and position the analysis line a dialog box is available To display the Analysis Line dialog box tap the AL icon in the toolbar only available in MSRA MSRT mode The current position of the analysis line is indicated on the icon User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 125 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode Position Show Line POO k
103. 00e6 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 184 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 4 6 11 4 7 Configuring Transient Analysis Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 87 Bandwidth Settings Useful commands for bandwidth settings described elsewhere SENSe SWEep FFT WINDow TYPE on page 229 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution on page 226 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution AUTO on page 226 SENSe MT T Me on page 184 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 183 SENSe DEMod FMVF TYPE on page 196 Remote commands exclusive to bandwidth settings SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow n RATiO ences 185 ISENGe IDANDwidtblDWIDUDTWINDow nzlRE Solution 185 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow lt n gt RATio Bandwidth Ratio This command sets the bandwidth ratio Parameters Bandwidth Ratio Manual operation See ABW RBW on page 89 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow lt n gt RESolution Bandwidth Resolution This command sets the bandwidth resolution in HZ Parameters Bandwidth Resolution Manual operation See RBW on page 89 Selecting the
104. 02 53 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Results Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis Both the current capture buffer data and the cummulated captured data from a series of measurements are evaluated The statistics computed only from hops chirps within the current capture buffer are highlighted green For reference the measured parame ters from the Select Hop Select Chirp are also shown highlighted blue The displayed parameters are the same as in the Hop Chirp Results Table and can be configured in the Result Configuration see chapter 7 2 2 Table Configuration on page 99 5 Hop Statistics Switching Avg Frequency Max FM RMS FM Statistic Aer me ime Frequency Deviation Deviation Deviation ms kHz kHz Fig 5 8 Hop Statistics Table For details on the individual parameters see chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 38 or chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 42 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH STAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 54 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Default Settings for Transient Analysis 6 Configuration Transient analysis requires a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key on the front panel When you switch a measurement channel to the Transient Analysis application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application see chap ter 6 1 Default Settings for Trans
105. 1 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 104 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis 7 4 Trace Settings Some of these settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed Full Capture Region Analysis Hop Chim 105 Select Hop Select Chit ici eu cerro ne ren Fen nr ead 105 Full Capture Region Analysis Hop Chirp For some result displays you can select the basis used for analysis e the full capture buffer e the selected Analysis Region e anindividual selected hop chirp only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed To select a hop chirp for the latter case select the Selected Hop Selected Chirp softkey in the Meas Config menu see Select Hop Select Chirp on page 105 The currently selected hop chirp is highlighted blue in the Result Table and Statistic Table displays As soon as a new hop chirp is selected all hop chirp specific displays are automati cally updated Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt EVAL on page 212 Select Hop Select Chirp Defines the individual hop or chirp for which results are calculated and displayed Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection SELected on page 215 CALCulate HOPDetection SELected on page 215 Trace Settings The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed in the window Depending on
106. 1 Softkeys Statistics Transient Analysis Mode HRE 10 Trigger Dropsout time erret eene 84 External remote m ele Tele IlySteresis inen ierit Catena ere eer 84 Level sik Offset Softkey ie eire ett bees 84 OUIDUE EE 79 84 Remote control lee Trigger level External trigger remote esses 178 UO Power remote sesee 179 IF Power remote sesseesseeneeeeeeee 179 RF Power remote is lafe tee EE Free Run sis VQ POW T NN IF POWER E RF POWE D M Trigger Gate Configuration Softkey sesseesssess 80 Triggers MSRA MSRT WE 81 176 Troubleshootirig E 145 Input overload eterne trs 156 U Units COMIQUIING DEE 104 IR EL EE 104 Reference level sssssssssseeeeneeene 76 Updating Ixesultdisplay ieer rt rrr het Her R EP Repe Result display remote SO UMA ee m TE Ww Window functions see FFT window functions eessssssse 16 90 Window title bar information ssesessseeeee 12 Windows Adding remote Closing remote a COMMOUMING PER RP ee Layout remote iss Maximizing remote ssssseee Querying remote A Replacing remote a Splitting remote cece eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee Types remote aeree ettet het ete X X value
107. 105 e Traco Data Export Configurotlohi oce destinies ein cene cii 108 e SOpecuWogram SOUNGS nore De erae R e d deor Re rase ama 110 AE dme CL 115 e Marker le EE 118 e lt ZOOM FONS TONS eieiei edd ege 124 e Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode 125 7 1 Display Configuration The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for the Transient Analysis application are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following e Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display Config button in the Overview e Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in the main TA Meas menu Up to six evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The evaluation methods available for Transient Analysis are described in chapter 5 3 Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis on page 45 o For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual 7 2 Result Configuration Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window see Specifics for on page 58 The Result Configuration dialog box is available by selecting the Result Config soft key or the Result Config button in the Overview ERREUR E E e e e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL
108. 15 IData Acquisition Analysis Region E Data Acquisition Full Analysis Region AR Link AR to Fu Sample Rate 400 0 MHz Delta Freq Meas Time 350 0us Time Gate Length LI HEES e 140000 Time Gate Start MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual The settings in this dialog box are available when you do one of the following e Select the Data Acquisition button from the Overview e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Data Acquisition Config softkey Measurement BarndWIGdlly 2 i rt en e adecuados 87 Sample EE 87 Measuremebt TNI EE 87 Record Lengi EE 87 PUVA EL E 87 L Analysis Banidwidihis eei ttti etd ose ritu lated ed bue dn 88 L Delta begoen eege eege 88 L Time Gate Lenggh EE 88 Eu TT ete Dia utes a dea an gate tania baad 88 L Linked analysis bandwidth i 88 L Linked analysis time span 88 L Visualizing the Analysis Region Parameters Show Diagram 88 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 86 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration aN aS a ee Data Ac
109. 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567 Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 72 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environ ment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA Configuring the mixer and band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX
110. 25 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis MAMMA U u e Ms Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example INIT CONT OFF Stop the continuous sweep CALC SGR FRAM SEL 25 Selects frame number 25 Manual operation See Selecting a frame to display on page 95 CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram HDEPth History This command defines the number of frames to be stored in the R amp S FSW memory Parameters Depth Example CALC SGR SPEC 1500 Sets the history depth to 1500 Manual operation See History Depth on page 112 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution lt TimeRes gt This command sets the spectrogram time resolution for CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution AUTO OFF The time resolution determines the size of the bins used for each FFT calculation The shorter the time span used for each FFT the shorter the resulting span and thus the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes Parameters lt TimeRes gt The values depend on the evaluation basis of the spectro
111. 3 CALCulate RTMS ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 126 CALCulate RTMS ALINe VALue Position This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master Parameters Position Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time pretrigger posttrigger of the MSRT measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 126 CALCulate RTMS WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRT View or MSRT Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only er H User Manual 1175 6478 02
112. 5 Spectrogram with default color curve The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors After shifting the color curve to the left negative value more colors cover the range from 105 5 dBm to 60 dBm blue green and yellow which occurs more often in the example The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm on the other hand is dominated by various shades of red only Fig 4 16 Non linear color curve shape 0 5 Fig 4 17 Spectrogram with shifted color curve EE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 34 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 4 8 3 4 9 Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode Markers in the Spectrogram Markers and delta markers are shaped like diamonds in the spectrogram They are only displayed in the spectrogram if the marker position is inside the visible area of the spectrogram If more than two markers are active the marker values are displayed in a separate marker table In the spectrum result display the markers and their frequency and level values 1 are displayed as usual Additionally the frame number is displayed to indicate the position of the marker in time 2 M1 1 24 01 dBm Frequency and Power Level Gate MHz of the Marker D2 1 22 31 dB 4 50 286 00 MHz Frame Number of the Marker In the spectrogram result display you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time Each marker can be assigned to a different frame Therefore in addition to the frequency y
113. 75 6478 02 02 176 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Dee Configuring Transient Analysis OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned e Configuring the Triggering Condttons eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaaeeeeeteeaaees 177 Configuring the Trigger OUIDUL see rre tur ro itte t nece enne 181 11 4 4 1 Configuring the Triggering Conditions TRIGE S EQuence DTM PH 177 1RIGSer S EQuence HOLDOM TIME EE 177 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDOoff eese nnne nennen nnns 177 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis eese ener nennen nnns 178 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port cessere 178 TRIGser SEQuence E E 179 TRlGoert GtOuencell EVel JObower nennen nennen nnne nan 179 TRIGgerSEQuence EEVel REPeWeE 22 TE 179 TRIGE SEQuence SLOPE says p 179 TRlGoert GtOuencelGOUbce hts ianiai enn sn nnns EREA aana Nna 180 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O0sto10 0s RST Os Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 84 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the
114. 77 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 173 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the
115. AIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 174 The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model e R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW13 15dB and 30 dB e R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B24 on page 77 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input I User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 174 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem m I M M M HU ST Configuring Transient Analysis If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 76 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State
116. ANGe AUTO lt ON OFF gt Defines whether the result range length is determined automatically according to the width of the selected hop chirp Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CALC RES RANG AUTO ON Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Automatic Range Scaling on page 98 CALCulate RESult REFerence Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the result range User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 214 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 4 Analyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters lt Reference gt RISE CENTer FALL RISE The result range is defined in reference to the rising edge CENTer The result range is defined in reference to the center of the pulse top FALL The result range is defined in reference to the falling edge RST CENTer Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Result Range Reference Point on page 99 Selecting the Hop Chirp The selected hop chirp determines which results are calculated and displayed These commands are only
117. ARMonic on page 167 Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 68 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 165 Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This set ting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer on page 167 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 168 e User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 72 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration MAMMA 8 a eS Input Output and Frontend Settings Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three port type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table
118. AVEPower SDEViatlon o corteo deren kna iiini 261 Ixseie3luleiscciF Wy EE 261 ISENZGelHObp STATeAvVERage eren n ennt en nnns n sese sinis ununu sitire irn 262 SENSeJHOP S TATE MAK UME saini iiia ua toad rona tad ato Face de rnnt en aiiai 262 SENS amp JHOP STATe6 MINIRIIT 2 Lucre tracer acute meo EENS eee deae keen d aee Ae 262 SENSe HOF STATe SDEViation ecceseeer ree kun cierre ont kn Lan Ranae RR iaaa aa 262 SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin eec tette teet tette toti 262 SENS amp THOP TIMing BEGID AVERag6e inre rte treten AANEREN 263 SENSE THOP TIMiB BEGIFEN e 263 ISENGe IHOp TlMimng BEGinMiNimum enne nnn rna 263 SENSe THOP TIMInG BEGIn SDEVIBUOTT 2 22 2 22 ee ER 263 SENSE HOP TIMING DWEL egener keen eech SEENEN REENEN SE Ee EE eet 263 SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI AVERage isses nennen nenne hr nh nete nnns 263 SENSe J HOP TIMIng DWELENUAIRTIT ET 263 SENS amp HOP TIMing DWELEMINIEFDUIY 2 222 222 t1 eroe rotae rore na eden exa de dria 263 SENSe HOP TIMing DWELESDEVIallOtI 2 22 tent rhe hieu tanen einn 263 SENSe HOP TIMING SVAITCIIING KEE 264 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Retrieving Results SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching AVERage sssesesssssssesse eene nenne 264 SENSE JHOPZTIMing SWITehing MAP EE 264 SENS amp HOP TIMing S WITching MINIMUM 22i creo nuce ce akon ren
119. Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Channel bar information In the Transient Analysis application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings een User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 11 R amp S FSW K60 Welcome to the Transient Analysis Application Eh Understanding the Display Information Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the Transient Analysis application Ref Level Reference level Att RF attenuation Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Meas BW Measurement bandwidth Meas Time Measurement time data acquisition time Sample Rate Sample rate Model Signal model hop chirp or none SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is dis played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 AP Clrw 3145 6 Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the Pulse application 5 Region FM Time Domain 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector mode 6 Trace mode Diagram footer information The dia
120. CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency lt QueryRange gt Returns the average frequency from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Average Frequency on page 40 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MAXimum lt QueryRange gt IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 258 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Dee Retrieving Results SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MlNimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average frequency from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the maximum Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current ca
121. Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 146 Intro CU CUO LUDERE 146 Common Sufflxes 5 AAA Aa TAANA RASANE SAAANA 151 Activating Transient Analysis cecinere nennen nennen nnne nnns 151 Configuring Transient Analysis eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenen nennen nnne nnns 155 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps eene 199 Analyzing Transient Effects rettet then rur iren ek Run RR RR DRE 205 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 249 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only 251 Retrieving Results eire ES EES EES 253 Status Reporting System niece etienne REIR NEES u en 280 N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 4 11 11 Programming Examples cesses ennt nnne nnne nennen nnn nennen 280 A Reference ASCII File Export Format 286 List of Commands iei aie acct s ser rata oot ne Reza ence eee 288 j 296 R amp S FSW K60 1 1 Preface Documentation Overview Preface Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting St
122. Culate AR FREQuency BANDwidth Frequency This command defines the analysis region s bandwidth Parameters Frequency Default unit HZ Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 LEE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 196 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Deg Configuring Transient Analysis Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 88 CALCulate AR FREQuency DELTa Frequency Defines the center of the frequency span for the analysis region It is defined as an off set from the center frequency Parameters Frequency Default unit HZ Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Delta Frequency on page 88 CALCulate AR FREQuency PERCent lt BWPercent gt For CALCulate AR FREQuency PERCent STATe TRUE the width of the frequency span for the analysis region is defined as a percentage of the full capture buffer It is centered around the point defined by CALCulate AR FREQuency DELTa on page 197 Parameters lt BWPercent gt percentage of the full analysis bandwidth Manual operation See Linked a
123. DATA on page 276 Parameters lt Frames gt CURRent Returns the starting time of the current frame ALL Returns the starting time for all frames The results are sorted in descending order beginning with the current frame Return values lt Seconds gt Number of seconds that have passed since 01 01 1970 till the frame start lt Nanoseconds gt Number of nanoseconds that have passed in addition to the lt Seconds gt since 01 01 1970 till the frame start lt Reserved gt The third and fourth value are reserved for future uses Example CALC SGR TST ON Activates the time stamp CALC SGR TST DATA ALL Returns the starting times of all frames sorted in a descending order Usage Query only Manual operation See Time Stamp on page 112 CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe State This command activates and deactivates the time stamp User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 227 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis b a a M MM UM Analyzing Transient Effects If the time stamp is active some commands do not address frames as numbers but as relative time values CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 245 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 242 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 225 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC SGR TST ON CA
124. DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 See Search Next Minimum on page 124 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 124 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 240 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 11 6 10 5 Marker Search Spectrograms The following commands automatically define the marker and delta marker position in the spectrogram Using Markers The following commands control spectrogram markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the markers CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 237 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 238 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 238 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 238 CALCu
125. ENSe MIXer FREQU enCy S TOP auii d e tote mee dea e dear sk ce ate EE Ee RETE en EXE REENEN 161 IGENZGe Mixer HAbRMonic BAND PRE Get 161 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue esent 161 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue SENSe MIXer HARMONICA Y PE EE SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW iieiea eene enne enne enne nennen enne nne tn sente AVELE ENEC EAN Ee Bel Ei Ee ere E E SENSe MIXer EOSS TABLe HIGEL ioi irpoc ANESEC eH REDE cde DEN e se ides SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW a Eja baee SENSe MIXer PORT m SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe ssssesssssessssseseseeeesen nennen set nnhn sent nns s tnnnts stint sse tnn sss e tnnt nn SEIEN EE en el E IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 290 R amp S FSW K60 List of Commands SENSe MIXer STATe SENSe MSRAI CAP T re e e 251 Ez TRUE T 184 SENS 18 zh ifo RE P 184 I SENSe RTMS CABTUFe OF FSGL errori re retento rtr erre aeu e PEUT EO FE EXE PE ERE EEN 253 SENS J SIGNA MOD Clete 186 SENSe SRAT6 ito St Rer Ed ch Parr e aat aE E br enn teasddnieuesl Aa a Dae EA EE E ERR aee Xa eadinns 184 ISENSS STATiSUC LY PE EEN 224 EI EES ek COUN TEE 224 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent 225 IGENSGe I wWEep ET WI
126. EPOWSLE coria e terno retirer tae Fawn Feed uae ke Fee dead eoa ekz bx p Fev y LO Rueda TRIGger SEQuence LEVel l QPower TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPOWer 2 rtr nter tton eterna nere rk nr d nae rena pega TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port eese nennen nennen enne 178 TRIGger SEQuence SEOBe retirer erre rne ti e re PEE RE X3 AKENE NAASE NETET 179 TRIGger SEQ uence SOURCe 1 rebote ern denne rer rie tni ond dd irae rk nn an 180 E User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 295 R amp S FSW K60 Index Symbols Automatic V ele DLC EE 96 gos ETUR 177 Average count 2 2 dee aee pudet coc 95 108 Average detector assioni iriiria 26 A B Aborting ST EE 94 95 113 Band AC DC couplihg treten 62 Conversion loss table B21 ussssss 72 Activating External Mixer B21 remote control 161 Transient Analysis remote sess 151 External Mixer B21 sese 65 Alignment Bandwidth Result range ape tenete 99 Coverage MSRA MSRT mode sss 35 Amplitude Data acquisition sese 87 90 Configuration remote ssseseeeee 173 Bias Configuration softkey sssssssssess 75 Conversion loss table B21 69 72 TE le EE 75 External Mixer B21 remote control 158 Analysis External Mixe
127. EXCursion on page 237 Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Pesk SARC EE 123 aeatrch Next E 124 Seatc n lu DEE 124 ele Ee OC ie un ET ME 124 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 238 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 240 N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 123 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis a Jvueag e Zoom Functions Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 238 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 239 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 239 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 240 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected ma
128. Effects teen etienne kun Eun na 205 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 249 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only 251 e Relreving WEI 253 e Salus Reporilg SyS EE 280 e Programming Exemples cce nere e rera ei iii 280 11 1 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank SS V M ae User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 146 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis b n Introduction If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma fro
129. F Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 95 INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA or MSRT mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA MSRT applications Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 202 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 204 Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 204 M User Manual 1175 6478 02
130. Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 124 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe lt State gt This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 124 See Restore Original Display on page 125 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 125 11 6 11 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 248 DiSblawvJhWiNDow nz LZOOM ML Tiple zoomzGTATe se eeseeeeeeeororerererernrrrner nenene 249 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 248 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 1 Frequency Sweep iRm
131. Hz Uca 73 EE E E PEA AE TRETEN 73 Insert EE 73 Delete E EE 73 C REESE TERDUM 73 ci E 73 UI EMT T 73 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 71 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Input Output and Frontend Settings Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 166 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 165 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL H
132. IGH RFSP DISP WIND5 EVAL SIGN CALC HOPD SEL 1 LAY REPL WIND 4 RFSP DISP WIND3 EVAL REG LAY ADD WIND 6 RIGH STAB Configure RF Power Time Domain automatic scaling DISP WIND1 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ON Configure range for 4 RF Spectrum A Region DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO OFF DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL MAX 80 dBM DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL MIN 130 dBM Configure table results show state begin length frequency max fm average power CALC HOPD TABL COL ON STAT BEG DWEL FREO MAXF AVGP Configure Spectrogram MAX detector largeR no of bins GAUSS window function query numbe SENS WIND3 SGR DET FUNC MAX SWE FFT WIND TYPE GAUS SWE FFT WIND LENG INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Retrieve trace data for RF Power Time Domain TRAC1 DATA TRACel TRAC1 DATA X TRACel Retrieve table results for first 10 hops CALC5 HOPD TABL RES 1 10 Store all enabled traces in all windows to a CSV file MMEM STOR TA MEAS C R_S userdata MyMeas csv R amp S FSW K60 Reference ASCII File Export Format A Reference ASCII File Export Format Trace data can be exported to a file in ASCII format for further evaluation in other applications The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec tion containing the trace data Generally the format of this ASCII file can be processe
133. IS User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 165 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem H A M M M M MH n Configuring Transient Analysis Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A Manual operation See Write to CVL table name gt on page 69 See Bias on page 72 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Table on page 70 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent Text This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters
134. IXer PORTSs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 65 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe lt State gt If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 65 Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables ISENSeTCORRechomnO EE 165 E Lee e Re ET 165 SENSe JCORR ection VICA TAlog eege tete Hai rea Cove tank adde ee salue AE 166 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 164 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe CORRection C VE QLEATL cce ekee esee ne Funde Rua SEENEN nsa hende Eh kn 166 Eer ed e Re el En 166 I SENS amp JCORRectionI CVU DATA riencia een c teh Dee reden esce ERR TREE RR EL RPIIDDLSDAOUS 167 SENSeTCORRectonm C VE HARMOBG a ii etate eret here adea vase ne Epod dens 167 SENSe CORRecUOn C EE 167 SENS amp TCORRB ection CVEIPOR TS iiri re tiegeetet EENS EE BERSCHENS EEN 168 SENSE TCORRection OVE SELegl TEE 168 ISENZGeJCObRRechon CHL SNUMber rere nnne en nennt nnns nnns nnn an 168 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This com
135. LC SPEC TST ON Activates the time stamp Manual operation See Time Stamp on page 112 SENSe WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram DETector FUNCtion Detector This command queries or sets the spectrogram detector type for the specified window Parameters Detector SUM AVERage RMS MAXimum MINimum SAMPle SUM Calculates the sum of all values in one sample point AVERage Calculates the linear average of all values in one sample point RMS Calculates the RMS of all values in one sample point MAXimum Determines the largest of all values in one sample point MINimum Determines the minimum of all values in one sample point SAMPle Selects the last measured value for each sample point RST MAXimum Example SENS SGR DET FUNC SUM Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Detector on page 113 SENSe SWEep FFT WINDow LENGth This commands queries the FFT window length L User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 228 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 9 Analyzing Transient Effects Return values lt WindowLength gt 1024 2048 4096 RST 1024 Example SWE FFT WIND LENG Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on pa
136. LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLALLALALAAAALALLALALLLLLLLLLLS User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 51 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results gt IO Data SES Analysis Region Complex Phase Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis PM Time Domain Unwrap Det 5 rac Data Fhase Auto Peak Unwrapping Detector PM Time Domain Fc wrapped Trace Data Auto Peak Detector Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PMT see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 PM Time Domain Wrapped Displays the phase deviations of the wrapped demodulated PM signal in rad or ver sus time 4 Chirp PM Time Domain Wr e14AP Cl 942 75752 100 1 0 952 757528 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PMWR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers Function Function Result Count 13 19705 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 233 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 233 TEN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 52 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Results MAMMA XT GJ npe srt Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis Chirp Rate Time Domain Displays the chirp rate versus time This display requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H 5 Region Chir
137. LLLLULLLLLLLU User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 97 R amp S9FSW K60 Analysis m O A YT Result Configuration Result Coo C 98 Table Conhguraton esconder AE Re eei Eb Erde REDDE Ree drin 99 e YANS 0o 102 EG Ts 104 7 2 1 Result Range The result range determines which data is displayed on the screen see also Mea surement range vs result range on page 38 This range applies to the pulse magni tude frequency and phase vs time displays These settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed Result Confic e NN Result Range Table Config Y Scaling Units Automatic Range Scaling Auto On off Auto Scale Once Reference Point Result Range Offset 0 0 s J The range is defined by a reference point alignment and the range length AULOMalc E e e inccr betae eren cde eventu undo Revver 98 Result Range Reference Polfit cierre teeta dain dea antl 99 n rm 99 A O DE 99 LODO BE 99 Automatic Range Scaling Defines whether the result range length is determined automatically according to the width of the selected hop chirp see Select Hop Select Chirp on page 105 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 98 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis 7 2 2 Result Configuration OFF Switches automatic range scaling off ON Switches automatic range scaling
138. Lected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Chirp Begin on page 43 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the chirp begin from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SSS User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 273 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis DEE Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp length from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Chirp Length on page 43 SENSe CHIRp TIMing _LENGth AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing _LENGth MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth MINimum lt QueryRange gt SEN
139. N SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 201 I User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 113 R amp S9FSW K60 Analysis mU NCC CC 9 Re H PPS E Spectrogram Settings 7 6 2 Color Map Settings The settings for color mapping are displayed in the Color Mapping dialog box that is displayed when you press the Color Mapping softkey in the Spectrogram menu or tap the color map in the spectrogram display For more information on color maps see chapter 4 8 2 Color Maps on page 32 For details on changing color mapping settings see chapter 8 1 How to Configure the Color Mapping on page 130 In addition to the available color settings the dialog box displays the current
140. NDow ENG 228 SENSe SWEep FF T WINDOWZTYPE iode eo reta ge e terne ae p aeree ee eta d ep Ee Ur ere n ve Deae eene 229 pilo H 200 CALCulate AR FREQuency BANDWeidlth eerie esee eee seinen nenne tantae tnt TESEU r EEE ENEE atas sane 196 CAL er e Een EC ME 197 CALCulate AR FREQuency PERQCent recess eee tee eret nnne hoan notan aoa anna aan apo Eso ato seas aeaa inah 197 CAlCulateAbRFbROuencv PERGentGTATe enne nennen retinentes etnies 197 CAL eran ER TE D CALCulate AR TIME PERCent D CAEGulate AR TIME PERGerit S TATS8 5 cerea a eterno ee haee eor FEY F eat eek apre eda cere Eege Edd 198 CAL era ET EE 198 CALCulate CHRDetection F REQuency LENGIGR eese merenti etre 190 CALCulate CHRDetection F REQuency OFFSet BEGin essen enne rennen 191 CALCulate CHRDetection F REQuency OFFSet END essen nennt rennen nnne 191 CALCulate CHRDetection F REQuency REFerence essen neret rennen nnne nne 191 CALCulate CHRDetection LENGth AUTO essei eee eese etes eene neat tn seta sedata sonno taste set tese done 186 CAL CulateCHbRDeiechton L ENG MA vimum nnnm nnnnn ren entn sent s eterne nnne 187 CALCulate CHRDetection LENGth MINimum a CALCulateCHh Deiechhon POWer L ENG CALCulate CHRDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin esses eene neret 192 CAL CulateCHbRfDeiechon POWer OEFGeCEND ee
141. NP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 77 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 77 Triggering The following remote commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 5 Trigger Settings on page 80 MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal Thus no trigger settings are available in the Transient Analysis application in MSRA MSRT operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger offset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA MSRT Master to the start of the application data for transient analysis See chapter 11 7 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only on page 249 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Y MM M MM PPPP User Manual 11
142. NSe DEMod FMVF TYPE eccentric 196 ERREUR E E E SSSR User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 195 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 4 11 Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe DEMod FMVF TYPE Filter Activates or deactivates additional filters applied after demodulation to filter out unwan ted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals Parameters Filter NONE LP01 LP1 LP5 LP10 LP25 NONE No video filter applied LP01 Low pass filter 0 1 bandwidth LP1 Low pass filter1 96 bandwidth LP5 Low pass filter 5 bandwidth LP10 Low pass filter 10 bandwidth LP25 Low pass filter 25 bandwidth Example FMVF TYPE LP01 Manual operation See FM Video Bandwidth on page 90 Selecting the Analysis Region The analysis region determines which data is displayed on the screen see also chap ter 4 5 Analysis Region on page 22 CALOCulate AR FREQuency BANDWidth liiis 196 RS Ee E KEE 197 GALGulate AR I REQUency en EE 197 CALGulate AR FREQUency PEROSRUSTATO uci iate ee Atto e FR REn Rx aha Reden e aba Ee 197 GAL CUIREAR MME LENG c ecu terrere tee eruere ioa agen REe ERE Rr NEE EREE urhe 197 CALECulate AR TIMEIPEBGGBL EE 198 CALCulate AR TIME PERGCentS TATe eroe eee erano eau eu RR RR cu dee Ded den eeu ducere 198 CAL CUIREAR OR 198 CAL
143. Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Alignment on page 99 CALCulate RESult LENGth Time This command defines the length or duration of the result range Note this command is only available for manual range scaling see CALCulate RESult RANGe AUTO on page 214 o User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 213 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Il Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC RES LENG lus Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Length on page 99 CALCulate RESult OFFSet Time The offset in seconds from the hop chirp edge or center at which the result range refer ence point occurs Parameters Time Default unit S Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Offset on page 99 CALCulate RESult R
144. Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Setting only User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 218 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis eS SSS ET Analyzing Transient Effects 11 6 6 Configuring the Y Axis Scaling and Units The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These commands are described here Useful commands for configuring scaling described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 173 Remote commands exclusive to scaling the y axis CAL IERT 219 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRAGe Y SCALE c cc cccccenneccenecenseseastenaeeeeeadeenereneeseeneneeanenanens 219 DISPlay WINDowsn gt TRACE SCALE AUTO accen rnnt ttc tete ce 219 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MAXIMUM eene 220 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MINimum eese 220 DiSblavJhWiNDow nz TTRACevtSCALelbDlvVision nenne 220 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition sese 220 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue esee nnne 221 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe Unit This command selects the global unit for phase results Setting parameters Unit DEG RAD RST RAD Manual operation See Phase Unit on page 104 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis
145. QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the maximum Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the RMS Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation RMS on page 44 L User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 270 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis DEE Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the RMS Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All
146. R amp S9FSW K60 Transient Analysis User Manual Domain a eQon FMg Meas BW E Frame n 3 Hop Results C 4 0 1001 Frame 010s Hop 2 ID Hop State op Dwell No Index Begin Time ms us Switching Time ns 1175 6478 02 02 Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 1 92 and higher e R amp S FSW8 1312 8000K08 e R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 e R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 e R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 e R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSW K60 Transient Analysis 1313 7495 02 e R amp S FSW K60H Transient Hop Measurements 13122 9916 02 e R amp S FSW K60C Transient Chirp Measurements 1322 9745 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2014 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde
147. REN EE DIAGnostic SERVice NSOUrGe 1 nn ted eorr dri rii inn eere khi pia ene rara p dia nee ananas DISPlay WINDowsn gt EVAL vic tou tet rt hee re rerba cose eet rat aa ehe E Raa aaa Ka Daaa Rae Ee Edu DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor DEF Ault ccecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeeeeeaee DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor LOWer sss eene DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe is DiSblav IWINDow nzIGCGhamlGbtCirogram COL or Uber DiSblawv IWINDow nzIGGhaml GbtCirogram CO ot Gel DISPlay VE On EE EE DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe esee nemen rennen nnne DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum esee ener DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MlNimum essent DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe PDlVision eese DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel esee nennen DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet E DlSblav IWINDow nzTTRACevtSCAlelbbOon nennen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALuUue essen eene DlSblzav IWlNDow nz TTRACectG LENA 276 DlSblav IWINDow cnzTTRACectzMODE nennen rnnt irren tr erret nne 221 IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 293 R amp S FSW K60 List of Commands DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous is DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe
148. RIGgereport OTYPO eege EENS ea Ee er tna eta ced ne o eene ERA 182 OUTbutTRlGoer zportz PULL GelMMedlate nennen 182 OUTbutTRlGoer zportz PULL Se ENG 182 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 79 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TSIGgercport OTYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear L User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 181 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis b_n Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 79 See Level on page 79 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputType gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt OutputType gt DE
149. Range tab set Automatic Range Scaling to Off 3 Set the reference point of the result range to Rise 4 Set the result range Length to 100 us Note that fewer spectrogram frames may be calculated as the result range length gets smaller 1 Hop Results Hop Dwell Switching Avg Begin Time Time Frequency Deviation ms kHz Hop State a No Index 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 10 11 p 2 Hop FM Error Time Domain 1 CI 3 Hop Spectrogram r Fig 9 6 Hop displays for a result range at the beginning of the hop 9 2 Example Chirped FM Signal The following example demonstrates how to detect chirps and how to analyze an indi vidual chirp The measurement is performed using the following devices e An R amp S FSW with application firmware R amp S FSW K60 Transient Analysis K60C Chirped Transient Analysis and bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 e A vector signal generator e g R amp S SMF Fig 9 7 Test setup User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 138 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples EH Example Chirped FM Signal Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMF Frequency 4 GHz Level 30 dBm Channels Linear FM up down chirp channel A0 MHz trapezoidal shape Sinusoidal interference on FM with 10 kHz deviation and FM spike in up chirp with 1 MHz deviation Chirp length 100 us chirp rate 800 kHz us Sample rate 100 MHz Frequency Modulation Path 1 Path 2
150. S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis El Activating Transient Analysis Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name TD SCDMA BTS BTDS TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 TD SCDMA UE MTDS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 cdma2000 BTS BC2K CDMA2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW MC2K CDMA2000 MS K83 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW BDO 1xEV DO BTS K84 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW MDO 1xEV DO MS K85 WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Realtime Spectrum RTIM Realtime Spectrum R amp S FSW K160R Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement ch
151. SO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 78 OUTPut IF IFFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency for the IF output The IF frequency of the signal is converted accordingly This command is available in the time domain and if the IF VIDEO DEMOD output is configured for IF Parameters Frequency RST 50 0 MHz User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 171 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Configuring Transient Analysis 11 4 2 Frequency Ei Ee eh 172 SENSeg FREQuency CENT amp rIS TEP 1 eiereceu eene xu oc ENEE Ende aaidaki Ea de epa 172 SENSe FREQUBINGY EE 172 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center frequency on page 74 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified
152. SS BaN EE 65 de uo 65 Mixer Settings Harmonics Confouratton A 65 Dee Type RINT 66 B 1 co 66 L Harmonie TNE MENOR 66 L Conversion OS RENE 66 External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 65 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe on page 158 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configura tion see Range 1 2 on page 66 For details on available frequency ranges see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt on page 160 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 161 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 64 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration i 8 a eS Input Output and Frontend Settings Handover Freq Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover on page 160 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields
153. STATes AUTO is OFF Setting parameters lt FreqOffset gt Frequency offsets from the center frequency Default unit HZ IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 189 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Deg Configuring Transient Analysis Tolerance Tolerance above or below the nominal frequency Default unit HZ Example CALC HOPD STAT le6 0 3 1e5 0 4 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Frequency Offset Chirp Rate on page 60 See Tolerance on page 60 11 4 9 Configuring the Measurement Range For some frequency or power calculations it may be useful not to take the entire dwell time of the hop or length of the chirp into consideration but only a certain range within the dwell time length D These settings are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed CALOCulate CHRDetection FREQuency LENGIR esistere nnne 190 CALCulate CHRDetection FRE Ouency OFF Get BE Gm 191 CAL Culate CHbDetechon FREOuencv OFFSer END 191 CAL Culate CHbDetechon FROuencv Rterence eene 191 CAL Culate CHRDetection POWer LENG cirein iinitan iaia a adaa 192 CALCulate CHRDetection POWer OFFSet BEGim eeeeeeeeeee esee nnne 192 CALCulate CHRDetection POWer OFFSSEEND iac nea iaai notet n een 192 CALCulate CHRDetection POWer REFerence esses eene nennen
154. Se CHIRp TIMing LENGth SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the chirp begin from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp rate from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Chirp Rate on page 43 UU User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 274 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 9 3 Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the chirp rate from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Trace Data In order to retrieve the trace results in a remote environ
155. Signal Description For details see chapter 6 1 Default Settings for Transient Analysis on page 55 Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 155 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Signal Description The Signal Description settings provide information on the expected signal which can improve measurement and analysis NOMA e TEE 58 e Signal Detection Signal Gtaies AAA 58 Signal Model The signal model defines which type of signal to expect if known thus determining the analysis method These settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed Hop Model Chirp Model Defines which type of signal to expect if known thus determining the analysis method These settings are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed For more information see chapter 4 3 Signal Models on page 18 Hop Model Signals hop between random carrier frequencies in short intervals Chirp Model
156. TRIG SEQ SOUR IFP TRIG SEQ LEV IFP 50dBm Configure data acquisition for 5 ms in a 80 MHz bandwidth BAND DEM 80MHz MTIM 5ms Configure the expected chirp signal manually SIGN MOD CHIR CALC CHRD STAT AUTO OFF CALC CHRD STAT 1e6 0 3e6 1e5 0 4e5 CALC CHRD LENG AUTO OFF CALC CHRD LENG MIN 0 0001 CALC CHRD LENG MAX 0 000350 Configure the measurement range Frequency calc cut off 5us at beginning and end of chirp CALC CHRD FREQ REF EDGE CALC CHRD FREQ OFFS BEG 0 000005 CALC CHRD FREQ OFFS END 0 000005 Power calc cut off 5 at each end of chirp CALC CHRD POW REF CENT CALC CHRD POW LENG 90 Configure the analysis region analyze 1 ms in 20MHz bandwidth in center CALC AR FREQ BAND 40MHz CALC AR FREQ DELT 20MHz CALC AR TIME LENG 1ms CALC AR TIME STAR 2 ms Configure the result range manually display 50us at beginning of each chirp but cut off first 5us CALC RES RANG AUTO OFF CALC RES REF RISE CALC RES OFFS 0 000005 CALC RES ALIG LEFT CALC RES LENG 0 00005 d ss Ed Configuring the results Result displays upper row 1 RF Spectrum A Region 2 RF Spectrum chirpl middle row 3 Spectrogram full capture default 4 RF Power Time Domain full capture bottom row 5 Chirp Results table default 6 Chirp Statistics table DISP WIND1 EVAL REG Programming Examples LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH RFSP DISP WIND2 EVAL SIGN CALC CHRD SEL 1 LAY REPL
157. The currently selected trace is high lighted orange Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe t STATe on page 223 Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe t commands Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 106 R amp S9FSW K60 Analysis mm eee Trace Settings Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 221 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Detectors perform a data reduction from the swept values to the displayed trace points The detector type determines which of the samples are displayed for each trace point Note The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace information in the window title bar by an abbreviation The trace detector can analyze the measured data using various methods Auto Selects the optimum detector for the selected trace and filter mode This is the default setting Positive Peak Determines
158. This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 72 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed YY YMMMMMM SM MPP P o User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 167 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis a a ee Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters lt Type gt string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 72 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORR
159. Tiate CONTinuous on page 201 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionality IE e 236 GAL Oulatespm MARKSELINK 5 ianua uua caia n rada ma endi cnn a ea eun zc aede cn ma maso cune daga cus 237 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 121 EN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 236 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 10 3 11 6 10 4 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt MARKer LINK lt State gt This command defines whether all markers within the selected result display are linked If enabled and you move one marker along the x axis all other markers in the display are moved to the same x axis positi
160. Trace 11 3 Activating Transient Analysis Transient Analysis requires a special application on the R amp S FSW A measurement is started immediately with the default settings INS TrumentGREAte NEW ert ret aa rne ee te e ae HR Eb ELE 152 INS Trumen GREate EE 152 ten ge Din ie 152 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 151 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Deg Activating Transient Analysis kg ien d pM 153 NG Lee lee ERECTO Eed dee 154 INS Tr ment SEEeci nie nem REI EENS HERR eae 154 SYSTem PRESetCHANnelEEXEQCulte 121 5 t nant nn arn rti Natr ee tnnt e RR RRR AR EE 155 INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measure ment channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 153 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel See INSTrument LIST on page 153 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 g
161. Trace to Export Defines an individual trace that will be exported to a file This setting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 278 Export Trace to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function the entire histo gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file The data corresponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded For large history buffers the export operation may take some time Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in th
162. Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between GRAYscale Shows the results in shades of gray RST HOT Example DISP WIND SPEC COL GRAY Changes the color scheme of the spectrogram to black and white Manual operation See Hot Cold Radar Grayscale on page 115 Working with Markers Remotely In the Transient Analysis application up to 16 markers or delta markers can be activa ted for each window simultaneously e Setting Up Individual Markers A 231 e ZSeperslkierket e DEE eee geesde Eege gei 236 e Configuring and Performing a Marker Gearch 237 e Positioning the MOarKGr EE 237 e Marker Search CSpectrogEafms eigene ca serae tede pa caters ed dev udo da 241 Setting Up Individual Markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzAOEtE essen nhssessssst assess iris sss ss saisis 232 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m1 gt LINK TOMAh kercm z sese nnns ennt ss sa an 232 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe eerie innen ndn ann hen ua nh aras denn 232 CAL Culate nz M bkercmz TR ACe este nntssse esit ii esse set isse asini snis 232 GALECulatesmnMARKersmpX si ccec0 cdeeessesddeceaediidasnensnaddcdensanaddacgaesdudenca asndadecdeseaddceeaaatde 233 GAL GUlate mnsMARK remeo EE 233 GALGulate n DEETamarketAOFF 2 2 reos ies nia anoo aen nane E aaa naa eA Rae NR AR eR ad Ad 233 CAL Culate nz DEL Ta
163. VL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB i Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Deg Configuring Transient Analysis SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACe1 11 4 1 3 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 4 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 181 DIAGHOSTIE SERVICE Lee 171 ODTP ttlEJEPReSUensy eut cosas Rete ENEE Ee RE exta ER 171 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the front panel on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV N
164. Vice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 79 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 80 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth Length This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output ES User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 182 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Configuring Transient Analysis Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Length Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 79 11 4 5 Data Acquisition You must define how much and how data is captured from the input signal MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the Transient Analysis application
165. WIND 4 RFPT DISP WIND4 EVAL FULL LAY ADD WIND 5 RIGH STAB Configure RF Power Time Domain automatic scaling DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ON Configure range for 1 RF Spectrum A Region DISP WIND1 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO OFF DISP WIND1 TRAC Y SCAL MAX 80 dBM DISP WIND1 TRAC Y SCAL MIN 130 dBM H H Configure table results show state begin length frequency max fm average power CALC CHRD TABL COL ON STAT BEG LENG FREQ MAXF AVGP Configure Spectrogram MAX detector GAUSS window function query number of bins SENS WIND3 SGR DET FUNC MAX SWE FFT WIND TYPE GAUS SWE FFT WIND LENG INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Retrieve trace data for RF Power Time Domain TRAC4 DATA TRACel TRAC4 DATA X TRACel Retrieve table results for first 10 chirps CALC5 CHRD TABL RES 1 10 Export entire statistics result table all params to an ASCII file MMEM STOR6 TABL ALL C R_S Instr user AllStatResults dat 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement This example demonstrates how to perform transient analysis on a hopped signal in a remote environment 1 a ett Preparing the measurement Reset the instrument RST Activate the transient analysis application Programming Examples INST SEL TA ere Configuring the measurement Set the cent
166. Yout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 208 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis b a a M UM l Analyzing Transient Effects Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt Windowlndex gt Index number of the window Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 for a list of availa ble window types Examp
167. a Rap aa aiaa iai SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic n SENSe CORRection CVL MIXOr fs eevee e pni accedere a cra dete iene leases EISE e ele ek CV PORT n SENSe GORRS6ctlon e Ee EE IENGelCObRbRechon CHL SNUMber AAA SENSe FREQuency CENT Eliise a aaa ianiai riaa daana aieiaiee SENSe FREQ ency CENTOr STEP nren toit ent secet ten E Eaa ey Eee De ea PADEVES ENAERE ANE SENSe FREQuUuenocy OFF Sel neret denn ey nie aed rrr Fe e eu Ri a Red nae tree ER ea ea aiii Enia SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm AVERage esses nennen nnne trennen trennen 257 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm MAXimum cesses nennen nennen trennen nnns 257 IEN Ge IHOb FREOuencv AVGFm MiNimum nennen eene nennen nennen tnn 257 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm SDEViation essent 257 SENSe HOP FREQUeNCY AV e KEE 257 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror AVERage essent nneen rennen rennen etr senes 258 IEN Ge IHOb FREOuencv EMERror MAXimum nennen nnne nne 258 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror MINimum essent nnne nnne 258 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror SDEViation essent rennen enne 258 SENSe HOP FREQuency FEMERTOt iiit eoi ege Eed EE ERE REO ES 257 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency AVERage SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MAXimum eese nennen nennen rennen 258 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MlINimum essere rennnren nnns 259 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuen
168. a instead see chapter 4 9 Tran sient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode on page 35 e Measurement Bandwidth the amount of signal bandwidth to be captured e Measurement Time how long the input signal is to be captured 5 Select the Measurement button and in the Analysis Region tab define the fre quency range and time gate within the captured data which is to be analyzed see Analysis Region 6 If necessary filter out unwanted signals using an FM video filter Demod Config softkey 7 Select the Result Config button and configure the data basis for evaluation and display e Inthe Scale and Units tabs configure the value range for the y axis in the individual result displays See chapter 7 2 3 Y Axis Scaling on page 102 8 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 see chapter 7 1 Display Configuration on page 97 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 9 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 10 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps on the Traces tab see chapter 7 4 Trace Settings on page 105 e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the signal on the Marker tab see chapter 7 8 Marke
169. ace is reset automatically to avoid false results e g with span changes For applications that require no reset after parameter changes the automatic reset can be switched off The default setting is off Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 222 V MH User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 107 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration Statistical Evaluation If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set you can define how many hops or chirp rates are included in the statistical evaluation For details see chapter 4 7 3 Trace Statistics on page 29 Selected Hop Selected Chirp vs All Hops All Chirps Statistical Evaluation Defines which hops chirps are included in the statistical evaluation Selected hop Only the selected hop chirp from each sweep capture is included in chirp the statistical evaluation All Hops All measured hops chirps from each sweep capture are included in Chirps the statistical evaluation Remote command SENSe STATistic TYPE on page 224 Sweep Average Count Statistical Evaluation Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 224 Maximum numb
170. ace mode also determines the detector type if the detector is set automatically see chapter 4 7 1 Mapping Samples to Measurement Points with the Trace Detector on page 26 The R amp S FSW offers the following trace modes Table 4 2 Overview of available trace modes Trace Mode Description Blank Hides the selected trace Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each measurement This is the default set ting All available detectors can be selected User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 28 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Basics EENEG Trace Evaluation Trace Mode Description Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each measurement until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi ble Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level Average The average is fo
171. age 176 INPut EATT AUTO on page 176 INPut EATT on page 175 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For information on other input settings see chapter 6 4 1 1 Radio Frequency Input on page 62 Preamplifier option B24 Input Settings If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB ST User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 77 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration H Input Output and Frontend Settings 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 174 INPut GAIN VALue on page 174 6 4 4 Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters o How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Ou
172. ally captures data the MSRT applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRT applica tions For the Transient Analysis application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 4 5 Data Acquisition on page 183 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the Transient Analysis measurement Useful commands related to MSRT mode described elsewhere e INITiate REFResh on page 201 INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 202 YY MMMMMMMMMM O M User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 251 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pee m M MM M M M l Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only Remote commands exclusive to MSRT applications The following commands are only available for MSRT application channels E TE TMSPALING SHOW E 252 CALOCulate RTMS ALINe VALue essent nnne rettet nh nh nen n nennen nnns 252 EBEN CA Lee EE 252 ISENSEARTIMSICAP TWIG OPI OBL d ceo eec eire t rra pone xe SR RR RN aaa 25
173. als The video filter settings are available when you select FM Video BW from the MEAS CONFIG menu FM Video Bandwidth Low Pass 0 19 0 BW FM Video Baltdwidlli EE 93 FM Video Bandwidth Additional filters applied after demodulation help filter out unwanted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals e Relative low pass filters Relative filters 3 dB can be selected in 96 of the analysis demodulation band width The filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidths e None deactivates the FM video bandwidth default Remote command SENSe DEMod FMVF TYPE on page 196 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 93 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Sweep Settings 6 10 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then evaluated They are configured via the SWEEP key Continuous SWweep RUN Bee ET 94 Single Sweep RUN SIMGU ET 94 ETC E EE 95 acil m 95 Measurement Ter accetto EI d iiU eti etc tdg 95 Sweep Average Gout 95 SSIS UG frame to display EE 95 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started
174. ameters Chirp Rate Fig 4 11 Measurement range parameters for chirped signals Each range is defined by a reference point an offset and the range length The refer ence point can be either the center or either edge of the hop chirp or a point defined by an offset to one of these characteristic points The range is then centered around this reference point R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 4 7 4 7 1 Trace Evaluation Example In figure 4 10 the indicated measurement range could be defined by the following parameters for example e Reference Hop End e Offset x e Alignment right e Length L Measurement range vs result range While the measurement range defines which part of the hop chirp is used for individual calculations the result range determines which part is displayed on the screen in the form of AM FM or PM vs time traces see also chapter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 98 Trace Evaluation Traces in graphical result displays based on the defined result range see chap ter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 98 can be configured for example to perform statistical evaluations over the selected hop chirp or all hops chirps You can configure up to 6 individual traces for the following result displays see chap ter 5 3 Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis on page 45 e RF Power Time Domain e FM Time Domain e Frequency Deviation Time Domain e PM Time Domain e PM Time D
175. ameters required to detect chirps In the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application for a chirp signal the derivation of the captured signal data is calculated before further analysis From there processing is identical for both signal models 4 3 3 Automatic vs Manual Hop Chirp State Detection By default the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application automatically detects the existing hop chirp states in a pre measurement For an initial overview of the signal at hand this detection is usually sufficient For more accurate results particularly if the R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 4 4 4 5 Basis of Evaluation input signal is known in advance the nominal frequency or chirp values can be defined manually Basis of Evaluation Depending on the measurement task not all of the measured data in the capture buffer may be of interest In some cases it may be useful to restrict analysis to a specific user definable region or to a selected individual chirp or hop This makes analysis more efficient and the display clearer Automatic detection of hops or chirps for example is always based on a restricted analysis region Numeric results for characteristic parameters as well as statistical results are also calculated on this restricted basis For graphical displays selecting an individual hop or chirp allows you to analyze or compare characteristic values in detail Which evaluation basis is available for which result
176. amples INST SEL TA ere Configuring the measurement Set the center frequency FREQ CENT 1GHz Configure a power trigger to detect transient power effects TRIG SEQ SOUR IFP TRIG SEQ LEV IFP 130dBm Configure data acquisition for 5 ms in a 80 MHz bandwidth BAND DEM 80MHz MTIM 5ms D eege Configuring the results Result displays default lupper row 1 RF Spectrum 2 FM Time Domain bottom row 3 Spectrogram 4 RF Power Time Domain Configure RF Power Time Domain automatic scaling DISP WIND4 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ON Configure Spectrogram MAX detector GAUSS window function Query number of bins SENS WIND3 SGR DET FUNC MAX SWE FFT WIND3 TYPE GAUS SWE FFT WIND3 LENG INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Retrieve trace data for RF Power Time Domain TRAC4 DATA TRACel TRAC4 DATA X TRACel Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement This example demonstrates how to perform transient analysis on a chirped signal in a remote environment a Preparing the measurement Reset the instrument RST Activate the transient analysis application INST SEL TA Programming Examples gy cceccmesenc Configuring the measurement Set the center frequency FREQ CENT 1GHz Configure a power trigger to detect transient power effects
177. aneously Initial marker setup is performed using the Marker dialog box Markers Marker Settings Search Ref Selected State X Value Marker Trace The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview By default the first marker is defined as a normal marker whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active selected BEE 119 SIRO e etiem retired tasse dee 119 Marker Postion X Valie keete Sie urnar aa iaaa aa o aaa da 119 Iz RTT EDI CTETUR 119 Marker Typel uiae b era ta bae bb e te ap e Ht Ruta 119 Reference Ee EE 120 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 118 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis Marker Settings Assigning the Marker to a Trace 120 Select MORBI TEE 120 isis EET 120 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 232 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 234 Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 233 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 235 Frame Spectrogram frame number the m
178. annel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 152 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt TA Transient Analysis application R amp S FSW K60 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 154 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 1 1 Configuring Transient Analysis SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 57 Configuring Transient Analysis The following commands are required to configure a measurement for transient analy sis TTT TE de cetera rene rei cose eee rr neo rene ee ee area en 155 HR 22 11 0 MR 172 i uolo 0 Uo SEN ces cceslece cecsse nc cecandan ces cass decescuansaiecceanssinccdedeyiaceccusvaaens 173 Ao Do e 176 e J taAGOuisiti n EE 183 e Bandwidth SONGS E 185 e Selecting the Signal Modal onc rettet e Does eicere iced 185 e Contiguring Signal Detectior iere EE eesti 186 e Configuring the Measurement Range enses eene tenen terna 190 e Configuring Demodulation c
179. ansient Analysis mMAA R CO rt Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a marker on a particular frame Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the negative distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC MARK SGR FRAM 20 Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM 2s Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago Manual operation See Frame on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer SGRam SPECtrogram SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the marker search area for all markers Parameters lt SearchArea gt viSible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram XY MINimum
180. arameters Time Range 0 to 0 00129822 RST 0 00035 Default unit S Example CALC CHRD LENG MAX 0 00035 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 61 CALCulate CHRDetection LENGth MINimum Time Defines the minimum chirp length for detection Parameters Time Range 0 to 0 00129822 RST 0 000001 Default unit S Example CALC CHRD LENG MIN 0 000001 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 61 CALCulate CHRDetection STATes AUTO State This command activates and deactivates the auto chirp state detection If deactivated the states defined using CALCulate CHRDetection STATes DATA are used Parameters State ON OFF RST ON N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 187 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Eee H nal Configuring Transient Analysis Example CALC CHRD STAT AUTO ON Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Manual operation See Auto Mode on page 60 CALCulate CHRDetection STATes DATA lt ChirpRate gt lt Tolerance gt This command sets and queries the chirp state detection table It con
181. arator on page 278 Remote commands exclusive to exporting table results MMEMobrn STORES TABLE iiic iironde in eere dere e adve EEN 277 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe lt Columns gt lt FileName gt This command exports result table data from the specified window to an ASCii file DAT For details on the file format see chapter A Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 286 Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Columns gt Columns to be stored in file SELected Export only the selected visible table columns ALL Export all table columns all possible measured parameters RST SEL lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TABL SEL TEST DAT Stores the selected columns from the result table in window 1 in the file TEST DAT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Columns to Export on page 101 See Export Table to ASCII File on page 101 See Columns to Export on page 116 N User Manua
182. arker is assigned to The most recently swept frame is number 0 all previous frames have negative numbers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 242 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 232 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 234 N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 119 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis ee el Marker Settings Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 234 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker wa
183. armonic Type Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 66 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 162 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second harmonic to cover the band s frequency range For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 162 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which of the available harmonic orders of the LO is used to cover the fre quency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of har monic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 26 5 GHz Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 163 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 162 Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods
184. art of the hop precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration Default unit dBm Example CALC3 HOPD TABLe 1 10 Result Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Usage Query only Manual operation See State Index on page 40 See Hop Begin on page 40 See Dwell Time on page 40 See Switching Time on page 40 See Average Frequency on page 40 See Hop State Deviation on page 40 See Frequency Deviation Peak on page 41 See Frequency Deviation RMS on page 41 See Frequency Deviation Average on page 41 See Average Power on page 42 CALCulate HOPDetection TOTal This command returns the total number of hops found EE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 256 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Dee Retrieving Results Return values lt TotalHops gt Usage Query only SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the average Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation Average on page 41 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQue
185. arted User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM deli
186. asurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer SANALYZER Spectrum Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation ADEM Analog Demod R amp S FSW K7 GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay MCGD MC Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW PNOISE Phase Noise K40 Transient Analysis TA Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS BWCD 3G FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW MWCD 3G FDD UE K73 Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 153 R amp
187. available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed CAL Gulate CHR Detection SELected EE 215 CAL Culate HObetechon SEL eched nennen nnne nnn nnns nnn nns 215 CALCulate CHRDetection SELected lt ChirpNo gt Defines the individual chirp for which results are calculated and displayed Parameters for setting and query lt ChirpNo gt Example CALC CHRD SEL 3 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Manual operation See Select Hop Select Chirp on page 105 CALCulate HOPDetection SELected lt HopNo gt Defines the individual hop for which results are calculated and displayed Parameters for setting and query lt HopNo gt Example CALC HOPD SEL 3 SST User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 215 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 5 Analyzing Transient Effects Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Select Hop Select Chirp on page 105 Table Configuration The following commands define which statistical and characteristic values are deter mined for measured hops These commands are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe COLuUumn eese eene nennen nnne nnn 216 CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe COLuUumn esee n
188. ay in a remote environment are described here e General Window Commnmsands 2 2 idisse tae potente reddere a ident NEES 205 e Working with Windows in the Display 206 11 6 1 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application BISPIa POR IWAN oiie T hed aipueleesancadseveatee scucbead a teas hast eka 205 DISPlay WIMBowsris S IZ E ecce rn fer tne Rue rn RR ne rna ERR ene Kk aa 206 RETTEN 206 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 205 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Analyzing Transient Effects DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 209 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again
189. b Automatic Grid KE e EE 102 AUO Scalo ONCE ME 103 Absolute Scaling Min Max Values eeeeeeseeeeeeenee eene entrent 103 Relative Scaling Reference per Division 103 EE 103 m ir s QW MMC E E 103 D p X cen 103 ee ene DEE 104 eer eet Nissin Sais noe Plea les A E E SE 104 E 104 Automatic Grid Scaling The y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement settings and results continuously User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 102 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis mE GO O Result Configuration Note Tip To update the scaling automatically once when this setting for continuous scaling is off use the Auto Scale Once on page 103 button or the softkey in the AUTO SET menu Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe AUTO on page 219 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe AUTO on page 219 Absolute Scaling Min Max Values Define the scaling using absolute minimum and maximum values Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum on page 220 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MINimum on page 220
190. b of the Amplitude dialog box e Radio Frequency InpUE 3 oen nere node e dead re e doas Iren kae Dee e E e ie XE eL e gs 62 e External Mixer Settings nennen nnn nnne ens 63 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 61 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Input Output and Frontend Settings 6 4 1 1 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is the radio frequency If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Radio Frequency Input Coupling Impedance High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector Radio Frequency TT 62 Input COUPIN DEE 62 pas sioc gie TTD 62 High Pass Filter WE E 63 VIG PESIO O E 63 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 157 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 156 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 O or 75 Q
191. both result tables it is not window specific These settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed ERREUR EE E EE E E e e e LLALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLAAALALLLALUAUZLL 9 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 99 R amp S9FSW K60 Analysis Result Configuration Result Range Table Config Y Scaling Units Parameters State Index Hop Begin LELLIG iss Export Dwell Time Switching Time Average Frequency Frequency Deviation Max FM Deviation RMS FM Deviation Average FM Deviation dBm Average Power Select the parameters to be included in the table and the required unit scaling if avail able For a description of the individual parameters see chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 38 chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 42 Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe COLumn on page 216 CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe COLumn on page 217 7 2 2 1 Table Export Settings Table results can be exported to an ASCII file for further evaluation in other external applications Table export settings can be configured in the Result Configuration dia log box in the Table Configuration tab in the vertical Table Export tab The settings are window specific and only available for result tables User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 100 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis Result Configuration Demod Config Table Config Parameters Columns
192. by the defined time gate the measured data within that time span then passes a bandpass filter so only the frequency range of interest is analyzed Depending on the selected result display the data is then demodulated if necessary and distributed amoung the trace points using a detector The time span displayed per division of the diagram is much smaller compared to the initial full data analysis Thus the results of the analysis range become more precise Capture Buffer Full result Bandpass Filter Detector Analysis region result Fig 4 9 Data zoom full result vs analysis region result Measurement Range In order to calculate frequency or power results in frequency hopping or chirped signals more accurately it may be useful not to take the entire dwell time of the hop or length of the chirp into consideration but only a certain range within the dwell time length Thus it is possible to eliminate settling effects for instance For such cases a mea surement range can be defined for power and frequency results in relation to specific hop or chirp characteristics eee User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 24 Measurement Range Hop Begin Hop End Dwell Time Frequency Hz Hop Center Nominal Hop Freq Time s Offset x Fig 4 10 Measurement range parameters for hopped signals Similarly for chirped signals a measurement range can be defined for the correspond ing par
193. cal evaluation Thus the overall number of averaging steps depends on the Sweep Average Count and the statistical evaluation mode EN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 29 Working with Spectrograms No averages for Result trace statistics over range 1 RR 2 RR S all hops chirps oct EE l Capture Sweep count i f ME 1 l 2 6 I OU EL I 2 1 1 21 1 1C O 2 m a 1 3 jd No averages for trace statistics over selected hop chirp 3 Fig 4 12 Trace statistics number of averaging steps 4 8 Working with Spectrograms In addition to the standard level versus frequency or level versus time traces the R amp S FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time A third dimension the power level is indicated by different colors Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics Example Spectrogram for the calibration signal MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm RBW 200 kHz Att 10dB SWT 4i 8us VBW 200kHz Mode Auto FFT CF 64 0 MHz 1001 pts 2 0 MHz Span 20 0 MHz 1 OAB E Frame amp 0 In this example you see the spectrogram for the calibration signal of the R amp S FSW compared to the
194. chapter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 98 e Inthe Table Config tab define which parameters are to be displayed in the chirp result tables e Inthe Scale and Units tabs configure the value range for the y axis in the individual result displays See chapter 7 2 3 Y Axis Scaling on page 102 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 see chapter 7 1 Display Configuration on page 97 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps or calculate chirp statistics on the Traces tab see chapter 7 4 Trace Settings on page 105 e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the signal on the Marker tab see chapter 7 8 Marker Settings on page 118 e Configure the Spectrogram display or FFT parameters on the Spectrogram tab see chapter 7 6 Spectrogram Settings on page 110 Optionally export the trace data of the demodulated signal to a file a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK How to Co
195. cing the available memory space may restrict the number of measurement channels that can be activa ted simultaneously on the R amp S FSW Remote command SENSe MTIMe on page 184 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 224 Selecting a frame to display Selects a specific frame loads the corresponding trace from the memory and displays itin the Spectrum window Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped and only if a spectrogram is selected The most recent frame is number 0 all previous frames have a negative number RETE RE E EE Ee E e S e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLIL User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 95 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration 6 11 Adjusting Settings Automatically For more information see chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 15 Remote command CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 225 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration
196. color map and provides a preview of the display with the current settings Start Shape Stop 100 0 Hot Cold Radar L i Grayscale Fig 7 1 Color Mapping dialog box 1 Color map shows the current color distribution 2 Preview pane shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color scheme 3 Color curve pane graphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme 4 5 Color range start and stop sliders define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram 6 Color curve slider adjusts the focus of the color curve 7 Histogram shows the distribution of measured values 8 Scale of the horizontal axis value range Start Stop Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range of the spectrogram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor LOWer on page 229 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor UPPer on page 230 Shape Defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display 1 to lt 0 More colors are distributed amoung the lower values o Colors are distributed linearly amoung the values User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 114 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis T T E Export Functions 20 to 1 More colors are distributed amoung the higher values Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe on page 230 Hot Cold Radar Grayscale Sets
197. comes non linear The slope of the color curve increases or decreases One end of the color palette then covers a large amount of results while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small result range The color curve shape can be set numerically or graphically To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider gt Select and drag the color curve shape slider indicated by a gray box in the middle of the color curve to the left or right The area beneath the slider is focussed i e more colors are distributed there 110dBm 100dBm 90dBRm B dBm 70dBm 60dBm 50dBm 40dBm 30dBm 20dBm 1048m start 0 0 Seel S1 stop 20 0 e Hot Cold Radar C Grayscale Auto 1 Set to Default I Close To set the color curve shape numerically gt Inthe Shape field enter a value to change the shape of the curve e Anegative value 1 to 0 focusses the lower values e Odefines a linear distribution N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 132 R amp S FSW K60 How to Perform Transient Analysis How to Export Table Data e A positive value gt 0 to 1 focusses the higher values 8 2 How to Export Table Data The measured result table data can be exported to an ASCII file For each parameter the measured values are output For details on the storage format see chapter A Reference ASCII File Export For mat on page 286 Table data can be exported either from t
198. command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 62 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 62 Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are described here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be eM PP P P P PP P M User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 157 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Lee M ST Configuring Transient Analysis installed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA MSRT mode external mixers are not supported For details on working with external mixers see th
199. cy SDEViation 0 ener 259 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQUGNCY c iccceccscteestecenctaceacescesstivosectostecanecocdewsbecincresaecsssdestessencnssasesssoserne 258 IGENGe IHOb FREOuencv MANFm AVERage 259 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm MAXimum eese nnne trennen enne 259 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm MINimum SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm SDEViation esses eene 259 SENSe HOP FREQU ency MAXFiTI 2 rnnt tre reb tre rr dece de Rege GEET EREMO RR dE 259 IEN Ge IHOb FREOuencv RM tm AVERage nennen ener nre nre trtn rennes 260 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm MAXimum essen nene nennen nnns 260 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm MlINimum essent enne nre enne nnn 260 LEE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 289 R amp S FSW K60 List of Commands IEN Ge IHOb FREOuencv RM tm SGDEViatlon nennen nnne 260 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm 260 SENSE HOP ID 260 jS ET HIglel mug aeaa e A O a een andes 260 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower AVERage sss trennen trennen trennen nnn 261 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower MAXimum esses enne nne tn enne trennen nnne nnn 261 IEN Ge IHObp POWer AVE Power MiNimum nennen nenne nrer nnne 261 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower SDEViation sese 261 EI Elle e ee 261 SENSe HOP STAT6e AVERA Q6 testata cut be ni REM Ee ere AEN aa ea ba e Ed deceased 262 SENSe HOP STATe lun 262
200. d by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point Thus you can define the decimal sep arator to be used decimal point or comma see Decimal Separator on page 101 The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the two lines containing the measured parameter names and units followed by the measured data in multiple columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semi colon If the spectrogram display is selected when you select the ASCII Trace Export soft key the entire histogram buffer with all frames is exported to a file The data corre sponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded Table 1 1 ASCII file format for table export File contents Description Header data Type R amp S FSW Instrument model Version 5 00 Firmware version Date 01 Oct 2013 Date of data set storage Mode Ta Application Ref Level 30 dBm Reference level Level Offset 0 dB Level offset Rf Att 20 dB Input attenuation El Att 2 0 dB Electrical attenuation Center Freq 55000 Hz Center frequency Freq Offset 0 Hz Frequency offset Meas BW 10000000 Hz Measurement Bandwidth Meas Time 0 000350000 s Measur
201. d moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 238 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis EE ae es qe Analyzing Transient Effects Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 See Search Next Minimum on page 124 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 124 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 123 Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT 239 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT enean 239 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eese 240 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz M Aimum RICH 240 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 240 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzMiNimumNENT nennen nnns nans 240 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK 0 0 e eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeanaeee 240 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 241 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt
202. data to the start of the application data for transient analysis The Capture Buffer dis plays show the application data of the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application in MSRA MSRT mode Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA MSRT Master display LEE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 35 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Basics Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode indicates the data covered by each application by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the analysis region settings as in Signal and Spectrum Ana lyzer mode The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to capture buffer start is indicated in the window header for each result display Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analy
203. ded in your remote control programs Parameters lt Source gt Example IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 180 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 4 4 2 Configuring Transient Analysis Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 82 See Free Run on page 82 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 82 See IF Power on page 82 See 1 Q Power on page 83 See RF Power on page 83 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors The tasks for manual operation are described in Trigger 2 3 on page 79 OUTbutTRlGoer zportz DiPechlon cece cence ee eaeaee ae ae ae aeaaaeteteteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeed 181 OUTPut TRIGE porn EVEL 2 etedtde EES Eed Eed del 181 OL TPut T
204. dth around the specified center frequency to be measured at a specified sample rate e By defining a time length during which a specified number of samples are mea sured at the specified center frequency 4 2 Signal Processing The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application measures the power of the signal input over time In order to convert the time domain signal to a frequency spectrum an FFT Fast Fourier Transformation is performed which converts a vector of input values into a discrete spectrum of frequencies The application calculates multiple FFTs per capture by dividing one capture into sev eral overlapping FFT frames This is especially useful in conjunction with window func tions since it enables a gap free frequency analysis of the signal Using overlapping FFT frames leads to more individual results and improves detection of transient signal effects However it also extends the duration of the calculation The size of the FFT frame depends on the number of input signal values record length the overlap factor and the time resolution time span used for each FFT calculation LEE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 15 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Basics EE O m A n Signal Processing FFT window functions Each FFT frame is multiplied with a specific window function afte
205. dwidth User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 17 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 4 3 4 3 1 Signal Models is automatically adjusted Which coupling ratios are available depends on the selected FFT Window A small resolution bandwidth has several advantages The smaller the resolution band width the better you can observe signals whose frequencies are close together and the less noise is displayed However a small resolution bandwidth also increases the required measurement time The resolution bandwidth parameters can be defined in the bandwidth configuration see chapter 6 7 Bandwidth Settings on page 89 Time resolution The time resolution determines the size of the bins used for each FFT calculation The shorter the time span used for each FFT the shorter the resulting span and thus the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes The time resolution to be used for R amp S FSW can be defined manually or automatically according to the data acquisition settings Signal Models If the additional firmware options R amp S FSW K60H or K60C are installed the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application supports different signal models for which similar parameters are characteristic e Prequency HOPPING ten ettet dead iret ere tace er ere deat ede es neater 18 e Frequency e ad dte rena der ee e tr e i ees eer a 20 e Automatic vs Manual Hop Chirp State Detechon 21 Frequency Hopping Some digital data transm
206. e Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 279 Spectrogram Settings The individual settings available for spectrogram display are described here For set tings on color mapping see chapter 7 6 2 Color Map Settings on page 114 e General Spectrogram Settiltgs ceret ree ee iie 110 e GColor Map Sells erre ideae ae daer trei aar fai ecdeg T ORTON 114 General Spectrogram Settings This section describes general settings for spectrogram display They are available when you press the MEAS CONFIG key and then select the Spectrogram Config softkey VY MM J MM P PPP o User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 110 R amp SSFSW K60 Analysis Spectrogram Settings Traces Transient Analysis EM 1 Traces Trace Data Export Spectrogram Display Settings Measurement Settings Select Frame O Detector Maximum Time Resolution Mode Manual Value 1 396 us te AU 1756 Time Stamp Color Mapping LT Continuous Single Ge O 1 Full Spectrogram D The FFT analysis used to create the spectrogram is configurable in order to improve detection of transient signal effects or minimize the duration of the calculation For details on FFT calculation see chapter 4 2 Signal Processing on page 15 oeleculg a frame to TE EE 111 Time Resolution CE 112 Hislon Depilin TR 112 Time
207. e Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Usage Setting only CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe COLumn State lt Header gt lt Header gt This command enables or disables columns in all hop results and statistics tables Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults query User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 217 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Setting parameters lt State gt lt Headers gt Example Example Usage Analyzing Transient Effects ON OFF Enables or disables all subsequently listed headers ON Provides results for the defined lt Headers gt only OFF Provides results for all table parameters except the specified lt Headers gt RST ON ALL STATe BEGin DWELI SWITching FREQuency FMERror MAXFm RMSFm AVGFm AVGPower All listed parameters are displayed or hidden in the table results depending on the State parameter ALL See chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 38 STATe Hop state BEGin Hop Begin DWELI Hop dwell time SWITching Switching time FREQuency Average frequency FMERror Hop state deviation MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average Frequency Deviation AVGPower Average power CALC HOPD TABL COL ON HOPNo STATe Provides results for the HOP number and HOP state only See chapter 11 11 3
208. e Traces exporting remote ssssssse 278 Updating the display Updating the display remote 201 RF attenuation Auto SOftKGy arin iieri chinks Manual softkey A RIP INDUD tn re e red nece Overload protection remote Remote noce Gre erro RF overrange External Mixer B21 ssssssssss RF Power Mole 83 Trigger level remote seeseeee 179 RF Power Time Domain Result displays ite ee reete ret Retirer S 48 RF Spectrum Result displays irre erre 47 RMS deteGtol irre tren treten riri reo 26 RUN CONT cR euer geet 94 113 RUN SINGLE S Sample detector sirenas dinr nene aenst 26 ue 87 Saving FPUNCHONS m 115 Scaling Absolute values nnne Amplitude range automatically ni el E li aeurie mc ndhu oeann ane E EAEE a ENEA Range Reference position eere Reference vallle rer neret n Relative ES Result range oco cere rei eret E dete meii drea Spectrogram S cce deer epe Een eins eech Units if c Y axis remote crecer enr erre er Et nre Repas Search Mode Spectrogram Markers cece eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 122 Searching Configuration softkey 0 ee cece eeeee rene eeeeeee 122 Select Frame Snc M teales 95 111 Select Marker Scy 120 Sequencer Aborting remote
209. e 108 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe on page 277 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 101 R amp S9FSW K60 Analysis Result Configuration 7 2 3 Y Axis Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These settings are described here FResult co fig L4 Result Range Table Config Y Scaling Units Automatic grid scaling Auto On Auto Scale Once Scaling according to min and max values Max 111 94 dBm A Min 111 94 dBm 111 94 dBm Ref 111 9 dBm Scaling according to reference and per div Per Division 0 0 dB Foods TS atoll 100 0 9o 111 94 dBm Ref Value 111 9 dBm Se 1 Magnitude Capture To display this dialog box do one of the following e Press the AMPT key then select the Scale Config softkey e From the Overview select Result Configuration then switch to the Y Scaling ta
210. e Domain Wrapped Res lt displays 5 refer rrt erede 52 Ports External Mixer B21 remote control 164 Positive Peak detector eesssseeeeee 26 Power results CNIP M Measurement range ssssssssen 24 91 bcc M 190 Preamplifier E ue WE 77 le 77 Preset Bands External Mixer B21 remote control 161 External Mixer B21 ssssssseseses 65 Presetting Channels 5 rri rtr Default values ial c E seits Programming examples Chirp detection nir rentrer reine 281 External Mixer B21 esses 169 hop detection rrr rre terris 283 StalisticS aiaei rere rt rr rer 280 Protection RF input remote essere 156 R Range e 103 104 Record length ito rere ertt rente beet erred 87 Reference Measurement range sssssssseeen 92 Result r rige inet rereee ri de ns 99 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 300 R amp S FSW K60 Index Reference level Offset Softkey aac ertet nnde 76 POSION m O 104 Softkey Sc UE ETC 76 Reference merker i nennen inea 120 Reference position SCAIING eM 103 Reference value SCAIING seeks 103 Refreshing MSRA applications sssesseeeee MSRA applications remote ssssse MSRT appl
211. e R amp S FSW User Manual E BASIC SOUINGS ss E ans 158 e Mixer SCUINGS ed entrer tte He Ie pn epe See Meet eee ee EU ee EEEE A 160 e Conversion Loss Table Setlfigs erre tnt tere ede nimc 164 e Programming Example Working with an External Mixer 169 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer SENSE ER KC IR 158 Esersubtiunedc m E 158 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW nnne ttti ttt tht tnnt tette ta tanaia 158 SENSE MIXE E OPOWPT c eise pe Leo orte a Lac oon aoa REESEN a 159 SENSeJTMIXSESIONAlL TEE 159 EE el EE 159 SENSe MIXer STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea surement This command is only available if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 64 SENSe MIXer DIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 158 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 68 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bia
212. e desired hop chirp see Length on page 93 Spectrogram of a selected hop chirp is empty Increase the result range length see Length on page 99 eM B User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 145 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Introduction 11 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis The following commands are required to perform measurements in the Transient Analysis application in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation e Using the common status registers The following tasks specific to the Transient Analysis application are described here SEM gel eio HH SEENEN SEENEN EENS EEN 146 CONN SUMO EE E e N 151 Activating Transient Analysis iiit eee Me ee Cet rete ARANAN a RE Ro Cue uud 151 e Configuring Transient Analysls ecran reine denn e nado ed 155 e Capturing Data and Performing weens 199 e Analyzing Transient
213. e gate Again be sure to include several hops in the time gate 10 Since the signal model is set to Hop the hops are detected automatically The detected hop states are listed in the order of their occurrence in the Hop Detection Config dialog box From the Meas Config menu select Hop Detection Config to check them User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 135 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Example Hopped FM Signal Signal States Frequency Power Hop States Number of hop states 6 Auto Mode On Frequency Tolerance 20 40031600 MHz 100 63200 kHz z 20 60029700 MHz 100 59500 kHz 20 80027900 MHz 100 55800 kHz 20 20033000 MHz 100 65900 kHz Timing Auto Mode Min Dwell Time Max Dwell Time Fig 9 3 Detected hop states To analyze an individual hop All detected hops are indicated in the Hop Results Table To analyze an individual hop in detail open a Frequency Deviation display and reduce the spectrogram to a single hop 1 2 From the Meas Config menu select Display Config Replace the Full Spectrogram display by a Frequency Deviation Time Domain dis play Exit the SmartGrid mode Select the Spectrogram display Press the MEAS key then select Hop to restrict the Spectrogram display to a sin gle hop User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 136 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Example Hopped FM Signal J 6 Select Select hop and enter 7 to show the results for the h
214. e marker for all MSRA applica tions For the Transient Analysis application the commands to define tha analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 4 5 Data Acquisition on page 183 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands Useful commands related to MSRA mode described elsewhere e INITiate REFResh on page 201 INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 202 Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels GALGulate MSRA ALINe SHONW 1 EE 250 CAL CulateMSbRA AL INelVAl ue 250 RE IEN E A Tee E E ER 251 SENSe IMSRA CAPTiire OFF Set eise tice e ate ii ee cuna o enn rhe Quee EN Ape wo es cle e dr gs 251 CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 126 CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Paramet
215. e suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow 1 4 2 Z200M STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 148 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 1 5 11 1 6 11 1 6 1 Introduction Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDo
216. eICHiRp FbREOuencv FREOuencv AVERage rehenes 269 IGENGeICHibRp FbREOuencv FREOuencv MA Ximum enne 269 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency MINimum eeeeee eene nnnm 269 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQ ency SDEVIA ON icini iienaa 269 SENSeJCHIRG FREGueney MAX EE 270 ISENZGeICHiRp FREOuencv MAXEmAVERage nnne nennen nennen 270 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFMMAXIMUM P eene nennen nnne nennen 270 ISGENGe ICHibp FREOuencv MAxEm MiNimum nnne 270 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm SDEViation enne 270 SENSeJOHIRDIEREQUenOV RMSFIE uit net doed aiaia a aaa nter ne ec aa 270 SENSe JCHIRp FREQuency RMSFm AVERA ge 1 eteceeeen nde ena tado e n eR Ranae do ENN 271 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MAXimum sisse nennen 271 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MlINimum esses eene 271 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm SDEVialtion eneeticnii eee ide eene eaaa 271 Zeller EE 271 Ei Ee e ET e 271 SENSe TCHIRDIPOWSFAVEPQOWEBET TEE 271 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower AVERAadge eere ie ieeecencieeciecsisleresiintiveeaiee 272 ISGENGe ICHiRp POWer AVE Power MANimum nennen nennen nennen nns 272 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower MlNimum esses nnne nnns 272 SENSe J CHIRp POWer AVEPowWer SDEVIAtOn deeper cca g ska aa adcp haac A ER 272 IER MID ODE ibi ws cde rcv tritani adip nu ne paf Dre dedil 272 Ei Ee GER NEE 272 SENSE CHIRE STAT eA at Tt KT 272 SENSe CHIRG S TA becht BON wri io ze
217. eak PICAMP 6 eati etn e ee ton Ref LOVE M M Ref Level Offset m aj m Result Config RF Atten Auto RF Atten Manual niue e Search Config Select Frame siisii naai Select Marker 5 rtr reinen Single Sweep S STT EE Hl El EE Trace 1 2 3 4 Trace CONTIG erem Trigger OMSET rinsio a Le eet iens Trigger Gate Config seesesssssesss 80 Specifics for lte Lee 58 Spectrograms BASICS Clearing Color CUI V6 iaiia eggeE end 33 114 132 Color mapping sessssse 32 112 114 130 Color scheme Configuring remote sssssesses 225 p wrniep 113 Display FFT window Frame count History depth amp Marker legend iiie tere UE cr Markers remote control T Result displays ie ert reet eder Sere Ino A Selecting frames ie E Time frames Time stamps Trroubleshiootitigi EE Value range iie iie etit reete Statistics ele uie ee 99 Programming example sssesssesee 280 Result displays Ur Ee Statistics table Evaluation basis sseeeeneeneeee 23 Status registers STAT QUES POW eec hnas 156 Status reporting system ssssssssssesss 280 Step size Markers remote control sssesssssss 236
218. easurement the diagram is empty As the measurement advan ces the graph is filled line by line from top to bottom Lines in the spectrogram are called frames as each frame represents one spectrum As the graph fills from top to bottom the latest spectrum is always the topmost line whereas older frames move towards the bottom However older frames that have dis appeared from the visible display area can be returned to view by selecting a particular frame or timestamp VY M Y User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 47 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis 2 Full Spectrogram 7 CF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 80 0 MHz Frame 0 Fig 5 5 Spectrogram of a frequency hopper Spectrograms are highly configurable In particular the number of frames and the col ors used to display the power levels can be defined by the user Spectrograms are particularly useful in combination with a spectrum display In this case the spectogram provides an overview of events over time whereas the spectrum provides details for a specific frame For more information on working with spectrograms see chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 15 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SGR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 RF Power Time Domain Displays the RF power in dBm versus time Detected hops are indicated by green bars alon
219. easurement Settings on page 109 FORMat DEXPort TRACes lt Selection gt This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 279 N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 278 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem m A CV M x1 Retrieving Results Parameters Selection SINGIe Only a single trace is selected for export namely the one speci fied by the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command ALL Selects all active traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file The trace parameter for the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command is ignored RST SINGle Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export all Traces and all Table Results on page 109 MMEMory STORe TA MEAS lt File gt This command stores the current measurement results all enabled traces of all win dows into the specified csv file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protec
220. easurement results Query parameters lt Trace gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 TRACe5 TRACe6 SGRam SPECtrogram Determines which trace results are returned If no trace parameter is provided with the query trace 1 is assumed RST TRACe1 Example TRAC DATA TRACe2 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA X Trace This remote control command returns the X values only for the trace in the selected result display Depending on the type of result display and the scaling of the x axis this can be either the pulse number or a timestamp for each detected pulse in the capture buffer This command is only available for graphical displays except for the Magnitude Cap ture display Query parameters Trace TRACe1 The trace number whose values are to be returned Currently only one trace is available Usage Query only User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 276 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Retrieving Results 11 9 4 Exporting Table Results to an ASCII File Table results can be exported to an ASCII file for further evaluation in other external applications Useful commands for exporting table results described elsewhere FORMat DEXPort DSEP
221. easurements INITiate SYNC This remote control command requests the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application option to wait until any auto refresh operation is finished However it does not initiate a refresh itself TE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 203 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis a ee a aM Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps An auto refresh is performed automatically after a configuration parameter is changed that requires the results and displays to be re calculated Note that hardware changes require a new sweep to be performed not just an auto refresh This command can be issued at any time but makes sense only in single sweep mode Example INIT IMM WAIL R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application performs a sweep and program is synchronized waits on completion of the sweep CALC AR FREQ BAND 10 MHZ R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application starts re calculating results with a new analysis region bandwidth but program does not wait until completion of the new calculation it continues immediately INIT SYNC The program now waits until any pending auto refresh calcula tions are finished before continuing Usage Event SYSTem SEQuencer lt State gt This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1
222. ection CVL SELect on page 168 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 73 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt lt File name gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Manual operation See New Table on page 69 See Edit Table on page 70 See File Name on page 71 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range IECH User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 168 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Configuring Transient Analysis Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of
223. ed at all The Shape and Focus of the Color Curve The color mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the spectrogram display By default colors on the color map are distributed evenly How ever if a certain area of the value range is to be visualized in greater detail than the rest you can set the focus of the color mapping to that area Changing the focus is performed by changing the shape of the color curve User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 33 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics ee aes Working with Spectrograms The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map By default the color curve is linear If you shift the curve to the left or right the distribution becomes non linear The slope of the color curve increases or decreases One end of the color palette then covers a large amount of results while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small result range You can use this feature to put the focus on a particular region in the diagram and to be able to detect small variations of the signal Example Fig 4 14 Linear color curve shape 0 colors are distributed evenly over the complete result range In the color map based on the linear color curve the range from 105 5 dBm to 60 dBm is covered by blue and a few shades of green only The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm is covered by red yellow and a few shades of green Fig 4 1
224. ee EU EMI 126 SNOW LING EE ETT DET T IET 126 Position Defines the position of the analysis line in the time domain The position must lie within the measurement time of the multistandard measurement Remote command CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue on page 250 CALCulate RTMS ALINe VALue on page 252 Show Line Hides or displays the analysis line in the time based windows By default the line is displayed Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Remote command CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW on page 250 CALCulate RTMS ALINe SHOW on page 252 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 126 R amp S FSW K60 How to Perform Transient Analysis 8 How to Perform Transient Analysis The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to analyze transient signal effects with the R amp S FSW K60 option To perform a basic transient analysis measurement 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the Transient application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Transient Analysis 3 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 4 Select the Data Acquisition button and define the bandwidth parameters for the input signal In MSRA MSRT mode define the application dat
225. eid 58 How to Se Measurement example ssssssseesss 134 Programming example cee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 283 Remote E Troubleshooting A 145 Hop Results Table Result displays rtr iiin 53 Hop states Auto detection rentrer 60 Basics COMMOUNING EE 58 Deleting ee Detecting Frequency EE 60 i Inserting SAVING EE gl vele EE sie TE 60 Hop Statistics Table Result displays 5 rris 53 Hops Average frequency sse 40 Average POWER iiiad ieii aaaeaii ra nennen 42 Basics Begin Detecting aio ort tente ecce 18 Display Dwelltime niente rrr Evaluation basis seeeenene Frequency deviation Frequency Deviation Average ssss 41 Frequency Deviation Peak sesssssss 41 Frequency Deviation RMS Measurement range seess Number P tramelers i entier tidal Selectitig niea reed irent cere anid Selecting remote ds Signal model 41 51 22 n ier eam et iced Statistics Result display sssssssssss Switching dE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 298 R amp S FSW K60 Index Hysteresis Bep c aai 84 l UO data EST ne eee EE 117 UO Power Tigger SOflKGy E 83 Trigger level remote eeeeee 179 IF Power Trigger SOMKESY E 82 Trigger level remote
226. en nne nennen rre nns erre nes trenes nnn 273 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin MAXimum essen nennen tree trennen nnne 273 E User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 288 R amp S FSW K60 List of Commands IEN Ge ICHibRp TTlMimg BEGin MiNimum emeret nes 273 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin SDEViation SENSe GHIRp TIMing BEGIR 1 iita treten dett nte Antec eras ede la ened 273 SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth AVERage essen nennen nretrrt nre 274 IEN Ge ICHibRp TTlMimgol ENG MAXimum nennen rennen 274 IEN Ge ICHUbRp TTlMimgol ENG MiNimum nennen nne rrenre trennt enne 274 SENSe CHIRp TIMing LENGth SDEViation essen rennen nennen 274 SENSe GHIRp TIMing BENGID 2 ot terre ot eet er eoo epa ates REL cea yea eg e Ps atu 274 IEN Ge ICHibp TlMimngohRATE AVERage rennen trennen erret 275 SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE MAXiMUM mener ener enne nne nre nnn 275 IEN Ge ICHibRp TTlMimnghRATE MiNImum nennen nennen nnne etre nnn nnne 275 SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE SDEViation nennen enne 275 SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE 274 SENSe GORRection CVE BAND E 165 SENS CORRection GVLIBIAS tereti eet teda het epp ia p Ue eter Du iate ge abd eue 165 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog esee essen eene enne nne tnnt aaa a daaa aaa 166 EISE e ele Ae IENGelCObRbRechon CNL COMMent AAA SENSe CORRSction GVEDATA deat cett bes pesto e Fe deba gere LR a eR ER uude s
227. ency REFerence on page 191 Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC CHRD FREQ OFFS BEG 3e 6 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 93 CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet END Time Defines the end of the measurement range for frequency results as an offset in sec onds from the chirp end This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 191 Parameters Time Default unit S Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 93 CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency REFerence Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the frequency measurement range Setting parameters Reference CENTer EDGE EDGE The measurement range is defined in reference to the chirp s rising or falling edge see CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin on page 191 and CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet END on page 191 CENTer The measurement range is defined in reference to the center of the chirp Example CALC CHRD FREQ REF CENTer Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement
228. ent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 182 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger and Gate dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger Gate button in the Overview Note that gating is not available for hop measurements Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Drop Out Time Offset Slope Rising Falling Hysteresis Holdoff External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box e t User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 80 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Trigger Settings Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Output Output Type User Defined Level Low Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger JL Trigger 3 Input Output For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal Thus no trigger settings are available in the Transient Analysis application in MSRA MSRT operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger o
229. ent on page 281 VY MMMM User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 212 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 3 Analyzing Transient Effects Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Full Capture Region Analysis Hop Chirp on page 105 Configuring the Result Range The result range determines which data is displayed on the screen see also Mea surement range vs result range on page 38 These settings are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed GALGulate RESult ALIGnment cc cetuccnt ee etd NENNEN dem een museum e esu dank ee 213 CALC late Te TE E 213 CALOGulste lge TEE 214 GAL DUulate RESUCRANGe AUTO EEN 214 CALCulate RESult REFerence essai eshii sisse tsssa si sss ii sisse saris i4 214 CALCulate RESult ALIGnment Reference Defines the alignment of the result range in relation to the selected reference point see CALCulate RESult REFerence on page 214 Setting parameters Reference LEFT CENTer RIGHt LEFT The result range starts at the pulse center or selected edge CENTer The result range is centered around the pulse center or selected edge RIGHt The result range ends at the pulse center or selected edge RST CENTer Example CALC RES ALIG LEFT Example See chapter 11 11 2
230. ent section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe on page 277 Export Trace to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function the entire histo gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file The data corresponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded For large history buffers the export operation may take some time Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 279 Trace Export Configuration Opens the Traces dialog box to configure the trace and data export settings See chapter 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 108
231. ept time and frequency mask Realtime only you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 179 Hysteresis Trigger Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 178 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Settings Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 177 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector RETE RA I EE Ee E e e e L A
232. er 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 91 Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 265 SENSe CHIRp TIMing RATE on page 274 Chirp State Deviation Deviation of the detected chirp rate from the nominal chirp state in kHz us RETE RE I EE SSSR User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 43 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results PIG MC c s Chirp Parameters dfdev dfzyg dfaom Where df g Average chirp rate estimate obtained from the frequency meas range of a chirp afrom Nominal chirp rate corresponding to detected chirp state Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 265 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror on page 268 Average Frequency Average frequency measured within the frequency measurement range of the chirp see chapter 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 91 Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults on page 265 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency on page 269 Frequency Deviation Peak Maximum of Frequency Deviation vs Time trace The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp see chapter 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 91 max FMerr KI if FMerr kmax 0 FMdevmax pero ge FMerr kmax lt 0 chirp start
233. er frequency FREQ CENT 1GHz Configure a power trigger to detect transient power effects TRIG SEQ SOUR IFP TRIG SEQ LEV IFP 50dBm Configure data acquisition for 5 ms in a 80 MHz bandwidth BAND DEM 80MHz MTIM 5ms Configure the expected hop signal manually SIGN MOD HOP CALC HOPD STAT AUTO OFF CALC HOPD STAT 1e6 0 3e6 1e5 0 4e5 CALC HOPD DWEL AUTO OFF CALC HOPD DWEL MIN 0 0001 CALC HOPD DWEL MAX 0 000350 Configure the measurement range Frequency calc cut off 5us at beginning and end of hop CALC HOPD FREQ REF EDGE CALC HOPD FREQ OFFS BEG 0 000005 CALC HOPD FREQ OFFS END 0 000005 Power calc cut off 5 at each end of hop CALC HOPD POW REF CENT CALC HOPD POW LENG 90 Configure the analysis region analyze 1 ms in 20MHz bandwidth in center CALC AR FREQ BAND 40MHz CALC AR FREQ DELT 20MHz CALC AR TIME LENG 1ms CALC AR TIME STAR 2 ms Configure the result range manually display 50us at beginning of each hop but cut off first 5us CALC RES RANG AUTO OFF CALC RES REF RISE CALC RES OFFS 0 000005 CALC RES ALIG LEFT CALC RES LENG 0 00005 EE EE Configuring the results Result displays upper row 1 RF Power Time Domain full capture default 2 RF Spectrum hopl middle row 3 Spectrogram full capture default 4 RF Spectrum A Region bottom row 5 Hop Results table default 6 Hop Statistics table Programming Examples LAY ADD WIND 1 R
234. er of trace points Statistical Evaluation If the number of samples within the result range see chapter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 98 is larger than this value the trace data is reduced to the defined maximum number of trace points using the selected detector For details see also chapter 4 7 1 Mapping Samples to Measurement Points with the Trace Detector on page 26 Restricting this value can improve performance during statistical evaulation of large result range lengths Remote command SENSe MEASure POINts on page 224 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 223 Trace Data Export Configuration The R amp S FSW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed measurements However you may want to evaluate the data with other external appli cations In this case you can export the measurement data to a standard format file ASCII or CSV EE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 108 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis EE ee eae Trace Data Export Configuration The standard data management functions e g saving or loading instrument settings that are available for all R amp S FSW applications are not described here See the R amp S FSW User Manual for a description of the standard functions Trace and data export settings ca
235. ers lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 126 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 250 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 8 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only CALCulate MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to Record length RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 85 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only In MSRT operating mode only the MSRT Master actu
236. es 269 IEN Ge ICHib p FbREOuencv MAXEm AVERage nemen nre 270 IEN Ge ICHibp FbREOuencv MAXEm MANImum eene trt 270 IEN Ge ICHib p FREOuencvy MAXEm MiNimum nennen remettre nnne 270 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm SDEViation essen nennen rennen 270 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm 270 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm AVERage sss nennen nnne etre 271 IEN Ge ICHib p FREOuencv RM tm MANimum nennen eene nnne rennen 271 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm MINimum essent 271 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSFm SDEViation 0 0 ennemi 271 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency RMSF m9 nerd ntt dise edipi EES sade epu Eg edenda HERR 270 SENS6 le ET H RE 271 SENSe CHIRp NUMBer eese 271 IGENGe ICHibp POWer AVE Power AVEHRage eene sete enn nr nen rnnn rne rnnn enne 272 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower MAXimum essen eene nnne nnne 272 IEN Ge ICHibRp POWer AVE Power MiNimum nennen nenne mrt 272 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower SDEViation eese rennen 272 SENS CHIRp POWer AVEPOWOI 2 ince ert nee ere onec MEE RD ei a x eere resp y Eee 271 IGENGe ICHibRp STATeAVERage neret nhetre treni tere nete tente tr trennen nns 272 SENSe CHIRp STATe MAXimum 272 EISE e ET REENEN ll KEE 273 SENSe CHIRp STATe SDEViation sss nne trennen enint 273 EISE ee Te WER EE 272 SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin AVERage esses eene te
237. everal sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment See Mode on page 106 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt JTRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 222 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis a ee se Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters lt State gt ON The automatic reset is off OFF The automatic reset is on RST OFF Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Manual
238. ffset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA MSRT Master to the start of the application data for transient analysis See Capture Offset For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual beleet S 82 BEL gol NENNT 82 beer 82 L External Trigger 1219 82 Ed dl DUO TT TM 82 M dno MORI TIN E 83 dx Rr HLE B 83 ee ee IRE 83 L Drop EE 84 lt ONS RT TT m T 84 coo NUUAM UMP 84 1 AMETE 84 L Trigger Medea eru eterni bid tri dd abe dud Oe ceo E reel Ud nali 84 sg EE 84 ER T ME NE 85 uto e 85 m Tsnm eri User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 81 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Trigger Settings GERT 85 bisaia Taga DENEN 85 Map Mies ONSE oic oe duisi E E a E NA 85 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Note When triggering is activated the squelch function is automatically disabled Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 180 Free Run Trigger Source Trig
239. g the x axis The currently selected hop chirp is highlighted in blue User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 48 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Results Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis 4 Chirp RF Time Domain e 1AP Clrw 856 25500 100 9 9 955 91000 The RF Power Time Domain trace is determined as follows RF Time Domain IQ Data Sue Trace Data Analysis Region Squared Auto Peak Fiter Magnitude Detector Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RFPT see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 FM Time Domain Displays the frequency of the demodulated FM signal versus time 5 Region FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw 500 0 us 1001 pts 50 0 us 1 0 ms The FM time domain trace is determined as follows User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 49 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis DL paT FM Time Domain IQ Data N FM L Det Trace Data gt a Analysis Region I c BW Fate Auto Peak Fiter EM Demodulator VBW Fiter Detector Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH FMT see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 Frequency Deviation Time Domain Displays the frequency error of the demodulated FM signal versus time This display requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H 5 Region FM Time Domain 1 AP Clrw 500 0 us 1001 pts 50 0 ps 1 0 ms Note The frequency error is calculated for complete hops chirps only Thus where no complete hops chirps are available gaps will occur in
240. ge 283 Usage Query only SENSe SWEep FFT WINDow TYPE lt ColorScheme gt This command queries or sets the FFT windowing function Parameters lt ColorScheme gt BLACkharris CHEByshev FLATtop GAUSsian HAMMing HANNing RECTangular RST BLACkharris Example SWE FFT WIND TYPE BLAC Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See FFT Window on page 90 Configuring Color Maps The color display used in spectrograms is highly configurable to adapt the display to your needs For details see chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 15 DiSblavJhWiNDow nz JSGbamlSbt Cirogram CO or D Fauh eneren ennnen 229 DiSblav IWlNDow cnzJGGbamlbtCirogram CO orLOwWer nnne 229 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SP ECtrogram COLor SHAPe eese eene nnns 230 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor UPPer essen 230 DiSblavJhWiNDow nz JSGbamlSbt Cirooram COL ot STviel esene rennene ene 230 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor DEFault This command restores the original color map Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 115 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor LOWer lt Percentage gt This command defines the starting point of the color map IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 229 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Parameters
241. ger Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 180 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Settings Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector on the front or rear panel meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 83 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 180 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input EEUU RU RA I EE Se A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLILLAS User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 82 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration T
242. ger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 83 N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 178 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Configuring Transient Analysis TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the UO data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigge
243. ges to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Band on page 65 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 158 Parameters Band KA JQJUJVIEJWI FI D GJ Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Manual operation See Band on page 65 Table 11 2 Frequency ranges for pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 161 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem m ss Configuring Transient Analysis Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz U 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State
244. gram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event I User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 243 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem A SS M M M as Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks
245. gram see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt EVAL on page 212 Range full capture area 1 sample rate analysis region or hop chirp 1 sample rate meas bw analysis region bw to full capture area measurement time analysis region time gate length hop chirp result range length RST 0 Manual operation See Time Resolution on page 90 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution AUTO lt Reference gt This command switches the spectrogram time resolution from auto to manual User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 226 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis b A aM NM Analyzing Transient Effects Setting parameters lt Reference gt AUTO MANual AUTO The optimal resolution is determined automatically according to the data acquisition settings MANual You must define the time resolution using CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution Manual operation See Time Resolution on page 90 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA lt Frames gt This command queries the time stamp starting time of the frames The return values consist of four values for each frame If the spectrogram is empty the command returns 0 0 0 0 The times are given as delta values which simplifies evaluating relative results however you can also calculate the absolute date and time as displayed on the screen The frame results themselves are returned with TRAC DATA SGR See TRACe n
246. gram footer beneath the diagram contains the following information depend ing on the evaluation Time domain e Start and stop time of data acquisition Frequency domain e Center frequency e Measurement bandwidth e Bandwidth displayed per division Spectrogram e Selected frame number V V JJV DV ar User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 12 Understanding the Display Information Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar R amp S FSW K60 About Transient Analysis 3 About Transient Analysis Transient analysis refers to signal effects which may appear briefly or change rapidly in time or frequency Typical examples are spurious emissions or modulated signals using frequency hopping techniques Such signals often require analysis of a large bandwidth if possible without gaps Ideally such signals are analyzed in realtime mode which employs special hardware in order to capture and process data simultaneously and seamlessly However if a realtime analyzer is not available the Transient Analysis application is a good choice Similarly to realtime mode but without the special hardware this application captures data and asynchronously before data acquisition is completed starts analyzing the avai
247. gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 76 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 176 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 77 eM V User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 175 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 4 4 Configuring Transient Analysis INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example I
248. he Result Configuration dialog box or from the Save Recall menu To export from the Save Recall menu 1 Select an active result table whose data you want to export Select the E Save icon in the toolbar Select the Export softkey 2 3 4 f necessary change the decimal separator to be used for the ASCII export file 5 Select the ASCII Table Export softkey 6 In the file selection dialog box select the storage location and file name for the export file 7 Select Save to close the dialog box and export the table data to the file To export from the Result configuration dialog box 1 Press the Overview softkey Select the Result Config button Select the window that contains the result table in the Specifics for selection box 2 3 4 Select the Table Config tab 5 Select the vertical Table Export tab 6 Select whether you want to export all columns or only the currently visible columns of the table N If necessary change the decimal separator to be used for the ASCII export file 8 Select the Export Table to ASCII File button 9 In the file selection dialog box select the storage location and file name for the export file 10 Select Save to close the dialog box and export the table data to the file User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 133 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Example Hopped FM Signal 9 Measurement Examples The following measurement examples demonstrate
249. he measured trace data is stored Spectrogram displays are continued even after sin gle sweep measurements unless they are cleared manually The maximum number of frames that you can capture is summarized in table 4 3 Table 4 3 Correlation between number of sweep points and number of frames stored in the history buffer Sweep Points Max History Depth lt 1250 20000 2001 12488 4001 6247 8 001 3124 16 001 1562 32 001 781 Displaying individual frames The spectrogram diagram includes all stored frames since it was last cleared Arrows on the left and right border of the spectrogram indicate the currently selected frame The spectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame The current frame number is indicated in the diagram footer or alternatively a time stamp if activated The current frame displayed at the top of the diagram is frame number 0 Older frames further down in the diagram are indicated by a negative index e g 10 You can display the spectrum diagram of a previous frame by changing the current frame number Color Maps Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors in order to visualize them The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 32 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics mA M HBB R LLIA
250. he selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 70 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168 Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 166 Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instru ment s C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 66 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Conversion loss tables can be defined and edited in the Edit conversion loss table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Table button in the External Mixer Conversion loss table settings A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries ERREUR E TET E e S A 1A A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL7LL LL User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 70 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Input Output and Frontend Settings eg s Table TC USERTABLE Comment User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings Band iam iim FS_Z60 X Harmonic Order Mixer S N 123 4567 Bias Mixer Type Position E 55 00000000000 GHz 75 00000000000 G
251. he signal model Hop Set the measurement time to 5 ms Set the measurement bandwidth to 160 MHz on o0 P The RF Spectrum and Full Spectrogram displays are dominated by the DC carrier Define an analysis region to extract the hopped FM signal Make sure that a suffi cient number of hops are inside the analysis region A second spectrogram show ing the analysis region helps with fine tuning 1 Magnitude Capture Frequency Time Gate Show Diagram Delta 20 5 MHz Start a Oms 1 Co faz Bandwidth 5 0 MHz Length s 0 ms J 0 0s 1001 pts 500 0 us 2 Full Spectrogram I SRegion Spectrogram 7 HE 1001 pts Meas BW 160 0 MHz Frame 0 CF 4 0205 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 5 0 MHz Frame 0 Fig 9 2 Configuring an analysis region for a hopped FM signal a From the Meas Config menu select Display Config b Drag a second spectrogram display to the right of the existing one on the Screen c Exit the SmartGrid mode d Press the MEAS key then select Region to restrict the Spectrogram display to the analysis region By default the analysis region corresponds to the entire capture buffer 9 From the Meas Config menu select Analysis Region Config a Define the starting point of the frequency range as an offset from the center fre quency Delta b Define the width of the frequency range as a Bandwidth Be sure to include several hops in the frequency range c Define the starting point and the length of the tim
252. hing MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe JHOP TIMing SWITching MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe JHOP TIMing SWITching SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the hop switching time from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Information on Detected Chirps The following commands return information on the currently selected or all detected chirps CALCulate CHRDetection LDABEe RESUullg n ete tede ceti e edet Add 265 CAL Culate CHRDetection TO E KEE 267 SENSE CHIRp FREQUENCY EE 267 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm AVERage isses eene nnns 268 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm MAXimum 2 eere eticeee esee denm aaia iid 268 IGENGeICHiRp FREOuency AV GFm MiNimum seen enne 268 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm SDEViation s essen rene 268 SENSE CHIRO FREQUENCY e EE 268 SENSe CHIRp FREQuUency CHERror AVERage 2 s rennandi iie 268 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror MAXimut inei tenen nn nhat nn Revo kae d alc sn aca 268 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror MINimum esses 269 U User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 264 Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror SDEViation cease 269 SENSe JCHIRB EREQUenSy TER 269 ISENZG
253. honhRtzet AAA INPUEC OW PIA Oirer arere A E Er A a EE EE EA E E NA R EDE E EAEE INPUTEAT EE INPut EATT AUTO i INPUEEAT ESTATE enirn ure rero ERR geed GEYEURVE FERRE CUEPEXEEEUNYE LER EN EAE RE UR EVE ERE TUR INP tFIETeCHPASSESTATe ss creta terret tr ee nr ea yere einer te e Ee e Dr RE Eee Dre Re INPut EIETer de RR NEE l ie RER INPNEGSANAueE Y INPUEIMPO Can Ge ege dee INPUT SEC EE INSTrum nt CREate REPLACEY creme acronis edere naa tae ette e hive dee INSTrument CREate NEW 2 INS Trume nits DELO tes T eee INSTrutmentbbS EE 153 To tEN ef Tuw eo oim i Y 154 teg Near Es ml e RE X 154 LAYGUEADDEWINDOW 5i sir tt rdi re eren etaed cerent a eee ere eee yer v ve eva ET Edu 207 LAYOut GCAT e IR Ke KEE 208 Eet el el Tee re 208 LAYout REMoveEWINDOw ectetur teorie eet e o era better p EENEG EC LAYout REPLace WINDow a ES desi dM EEE LAY Out WINDowWsris ADD es cete eere et gie etre nra Y tes ree erede ee TE MEX E D GR EE NE NER EE YE Red 211 LAYout WINDowsn IDENM ify oia entrare eataa sepe nea tuae REC Eo EEN ERES iiae ERR ER RR 211 EAYOUtWINDOowWsSn REMOWVS v ed ege ege geen rrt rh x EY ERE EENEG EE EERSTEN 211 SS
254. iation Peak ssssuusss Frequency Deviation RMS a e 44 oH Sc Length Measurement range sssessseeeeene 25 91 Number Parameters siiin iruna Selecting WEE Selecting remote D Signal le NEE Statistics Result display ssssssssss 53 Color curve GIE 33 114 Speclrogratmls ire eee Een 33 132 Color mapping Welle Colot range oce eet Color scheme Settings remote sssssseesses 229 SOKOV MH Spectrograms He EE KI ee EE Color scheme SpectrOgram EE 33 115 Columns EXpOELFIQ WE 101 Continue single sweep Gier 95 Continuous sweep ie 94 113 Conventions SCPI commands nere 147 Conversion loss External Mixer B21 remote control 163 164 Conversion loss tables 69 70 Available remote control esesssesss 166 Band remote control ssssssssssssss 165 Bias remote control RS Configuring EN EE Creating 15 ion ed eet Await Deleting remote control Si External Mixer B21 remote control 163 External Mixer B21 sesssessesess Harmonic order remote control Importing External Mixer B21 sssssse Managing EC Mixer type remote control Saving External Mixer B21 Selecting remote control
255. ications MSRT applications remote kil MH Region Analysis Evaluation basis 2 rennen eno 105 Remote commands Basics On even oeeksdgeek edi We steete seti 146 Boolean values Capitalization e nire esset Character data Data blocks is Numeric values n iren rere ttt 149 Optional keywords sssessee 148 Parameters ss lugo pe ES ENIDC E Resetting RF input protection ssssseeseeee 156 Restoring Channel settings neris 57 Result configuration le 97 Result displays 2 Chirp Rate Time Domain sesseeseese 53 Chirp Results Table A 53 Chirp Statistics ses Default aisciai mener terr rere FM Time Domain erret Frequency Deviation Time Domain Hop Results Table sisisi anir Op StatiStis x Iren rer Pete 53 Marker table PM Time DOMAIN retento 51 PM Time Domain Wrapped sssseesseeeseeeeeeeeeeenee 52 RF Power Time Domain s IE SOCII iiie i fete etn End ae ee ee Result range us leet CODIQUEITIG ses ccce hio oett ek E ere i eire Length Measurement example pur E HE Reference acd P pep vs measurement range Result tables ele Dee EE 99 Evaluation basis trennen nee 23 aC e 38 Data format remote sssssssses 278 Exporting e u
256. icer eterne ree etur kn the VEER 195 e Selecting the Analysis REGION oceanus eege cade vince geed EE RRR a 196 e Adjusting Settings Automatically iili reiciendis 199 Input Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources such as RF power sensors etc and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The following commands are required to configure data input and output PR ET EE 155 e Using External MKE TES 157 e Configuring the e 171 RF Input INPutATTenuauomP RO Tector EE 156 l insieme E 156 INPut FIE Fes HPASSESTATe EE 156 LEE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 155 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Deg Configuring Transient Analysis IMPutiFIETer Y IGES TATe eeu ze cote dat ennt sme ER Fa nte en unde Ren ENNEN bee e 157 INPuEIMPBSSREB EE 157 EE PS ois aoa E E E E E E E E E E T 157 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Pa
257. id iania aaia 258 SENS amp THOP FREQusncy EE ene iecit rere ne erede ene eda ee exp AEN 258 IGENZGeJHObp FbROuencv FREOuencv AVEHRage nennen 258 ISENZGe IHOp FbROuencv FREOuencv M ANimum nennen 258 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency MlNimum essit 259 SENSe HOP FREQuency FREQuency SDEViation eren audere REENEN 259 SENSeJHOP EREQUERCYIMAXETID 5 5 os caua pa eruta Pep ere eder are e ran iens 259 ISGENGeIHObp FbREOuencv MAXEm AVEHRage ener hr en nnne 259 SENSe 3HOP FREQuency MAXFm iMAXImu tmf i cece ce e ense re ERAN EE pea eoi ene ERR ad iets 259 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXF m MlINimum isses eren nennen hne nnn 259 ISENZGe IHOp FREOuencv MANFm SGDtEViaton eene 259 SENSeJHOP FREGOUEREV E EE 260 SENS amp e HOP FREQusricy RMSEm AVERGage 2 enter ied eee ted a 260 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm MAXimumY lerne iioii inaandaa 260 SENSeJHOP FREOUERDGCV RMSPm MIBNIUIS 2 AER pedro cet exp Ra cues 260 SENS amp HOP FREQusncy RMSFnmESBEViation 2 cere deren 260 ISENSeIHOR IDo ttes tette te tette tetas seen ss d 260 SENSeJHOPINUNIBO eegene geed geed 260 SENSe HOP POWerAVEPOWEGF TEE 261 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPowerAVERage ceret ERAN EENS ANN 261 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower MAXimum isses essen eren nre 261 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower MINimum eeesseesssss esee nnne ntn nna 261 SENSe HOP POWer
258. ient Analysis on page 55 After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel in the Transient Analysis application a Transient measurement for the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The Meas Config menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions Automatic refresh of preview and visualization in dialog boxes after configura tion changes The R amp S FSW supports you in finding the correct measurement settings quickly and easily after each change in settings in dialog boxes the preview and visualization areas are updated immediately and automatically to reflect the changes Thus you can see if the setting is appropriate or not before closing the dialog e Default Settings for Transient AnalySis 22 ccccesccecteceeeceeteceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteneeneeees 55 LEES EET 56 s Signal DESGnpuony ics E 58 e Input OutpUtcand Frontend Settings entnehmen nnn 61 e oger Segs aiene aaa ette RR Dr ec n Re ERR nale RR He ee 80 e Data Acquisition and Analysis Region 86 e Bandwidth Seftiigg eerte eene ende E Er ER eats 89 e Hop Chirp Measurement Settings sese 91 e FM Video BaldWidiki EE 93 EE Le E 94 e Adjusting Settings Eer 96 6 1 Default Setti
259. in MSRA MSRT mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod encres 183 SENSe MTIMB 1 eiit cnncta tnt nct decere dta decanatu a du dr t dd 184 Co 184 EENEG eae ee 184 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod Bandwidth Defines the measurement bandwidth in Hz Note that the sample rate and the measurement bandwidth are interdependent see SENSe SRATe on page 184 For information on supported sample rates and band widths see the data sheet Parameters Bandwidth Range 80 Hz to depends on options installed RST maximum allowed Default unit HZ Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Measurement Bandwidth on page 87 EN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 183 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem S SS M M ss Configuring Transient Analysis SENSe MTIMe lt MeasTime gt This command defines the time data is captured Note that the record length and the measurement time are
260. in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 74 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 172 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 4 3 Configuring Transient Analysis If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application Note In MSRA MSRT mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master For MSRA MSRT applications only the query command is available Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 75 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere e INPut COUPling on page 156 INPut IMPedance on page 157 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO on page 219 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DiSblavJhWiNDow nz TTRACevtSCALelbRLEVel esent 173 DiSblavJhWiNDow n
261. io EE 123 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 122 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis BREET Marker Settings Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak 7 8 3 2 Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT on page 239 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 237 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 239 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 238 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 240 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 238 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 240 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 238 DE CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 240 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 238 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 241 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt on page 239 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer P
262. irp States table The devi ation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp For details see Frequency Deviation Peak on page 44 Default unit kHz User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 266 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Il Retrieving Results lt FMDevRMS gt RMS deviation of the chirp frequency from the nominal linear chirp frequency as defined in the Chirp States table The devi ation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp For details see Frequency Deviation RMS on page 44 Default unit kHz lt FMDevAvg gt Average deviation of the chirp frequency from the nominal lin ear chirp frequency as defined in the Chirp States table The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the chirp For details see Frequency Deviation Average on page 44 Default unit kHz lt PowAvg gt Average power level measured during a chirp Which part of the chirp precisely is used for calculation depends on the power parameters in the Power measurement range configuration Default unit dBm Example CALC3 CHRD TABLe 1 10 Result Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Usage Query only Manual operation See State Index on page 43 See Chirp Begin on page 43 See Chirp Length on page 43 See Chirp Rate on page 43 See Chirp State Deviation on
263. is Example CALC HOPD DWEL MAX 0 00129822 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 61 CALCulate HOPDetection DWELI MINimum Time This command sets the minimum dwell time for hop detection Note this command is only available for manual timing mode see CALCulate HOPDetection DWELL AUTO on page 188 Parameters Time Range 0 to 0 00129822 RST 0 000001 Default unit S Example CALC HOPD DWEL MIN 0 000001 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 61 CALCulate HOPDetection STATes AUTO State This command activates and deactivates the auto hop state detection If deactivated the states defined using CALCulate HOPDetection STATes DATA are used Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CALC HOPD STAT AUTO ON Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Auto Mode on page 60 CALCulate HOPDetection STATes DATA lt FreqOffset gt Tolerance This command sets and queries the hop state detection table It consists of a comma separated list of value pairs one for each possible hop state Note that the state table can only be configured manually if CALCulate HOPDetection
264. ission standards employ a frequency hopping technique in which a carrier signal is rapidly switched among many frequency channels Discrete frequencies and continuous modulation are characteristic of this signal model ERREUR RU E IET EE RT I e e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLIM J User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 18 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics Signal Models 2 Full Spectrogram 7 CF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 80 0 MHz Frame 0 Fig 4 4 Typical spectrogram of a frequency hopping signal Analyzing such signals includes the following challenges e Detecting the currently used carrier frequency and a possible offset e Determining the duration the signal stays at one frequency and the time it takes to switch to another e Measuring the average power level e Demodulating the signal correctly The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application with the additional R amp S FSW K60H option installed can automatically detect frequency hops in a measured signal and determine characteristic hop parameters Both pulsed and continuous wave hopping signals can be analyzed Assuming a frequency hopping signal model the frequency bands in which the carrier can be expected are usually known in advance Therefore you can configure condi tions that must apply to the measured signal in order to detect a frequency hop and distinguish it from random spurs or frequency distortions Such conditions can be a fre quency tolera
265. l 1175 6478 02 02 277 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pec RSV E RU sex Retrieving Results 11 9 5 Exporting Trace Results Trace results can be exported to a file For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S FSW User Manual FORMatDEXP ort DS E Eat getrei 278 FORMatDEXPOoftHEADEL 1 1 tiim eae ctos osea dene agone de oho quen MR Pon Ee aspi dida Ra 278 FOBRMatDEXPOIETRADES cert coerente areae dees Paare tak eege 278 TEE STORE AE 279 MMEMorng sS TORSSnhn NEE 279 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Decimal Separator on page 101 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt State gt If enabled additional instrument and measurement settings are included in the header of the export file for result data If disabled only the pure result data from the selected traces and tables is exported Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Include Instrument M
266. lable input and displays first results Especially for large bandwidths or long mea surement times analysis becomes much more efficient and the complete measure ment task can be sped up significantly Although gaps may occur between successive measurements with large bandwidths the results from each individual measurement are completely without gaps Thus the Transient Analysis application supports you in analyzing time and fre quency variant signals with large bandwidths SSS User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 14 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Basics Data Acquisition 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in analysis of transi ent signals is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings xMP ce culi 15 LEM neo TERI 15 e Signal Models EE 18 e Basio OF EVA AW OM icc svete 22 e Analysis ROegloh eae ert rete ee rade eee ieee ro ee Ea eee 22 e TTT le EES 24 e RAGS IU c M M 26 e Working with Spectroorain Si eorr NEEN SEENEN NEE 30 e Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode AAA 35 4 1 Data Acquisition The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application measures the power of the signal input over time How much data is captured depends on the measurement bandwidth and the measurement time These two values are interdependant and allow you to define the data to be measured using different methods e By defining a bandwi
267. late lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 238 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 238 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 239 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimu RIGHt on page 239 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe sees 242 CALCulate n MARKer SGRam SPECtrogram SARea essen 242 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK 242 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK 242 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWVe sss 242 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELoOw ee 243 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT eeeeeeeee 243 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK sss 243 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe 243 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELoOw sss 243 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT esee 244 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK 244 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Tr
268. le LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter As opposed to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 206 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 209 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Analyzing Transient Effects y 100 x 100 y 100 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters Index1 The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the
269. le memory space may restrict the number of measurement channels that can be activated simul taneously on the R amp S FSW Remote command SENSe RLENgth on page 184 Analysis Region The analysis region determines which data is displayed on the screen see also chap ter 4 5 Analysis Region on page 22 The region is defined by a frequency span and a time gate for which the results are displayed The time and frequency spans can be defined either as absolute values or relative to the full capture buffer Both methods can be combined for example by defining an absolute frequency span and a relative time gate EEUU RU RE I E EI E E e e LLL 1 LLLUULLLLLLLLLLLLLLL EE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 87 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration a SS a ee Data Acquisition and Analysis Region Analysis Bandwidth Analysis Region Defines the absolute width of the frequency span for the analysis region It is centered around the point defined by the Delta Frequency Remote command CALCulate AR FREQuency BANDwidth on page 196 Delta Frequency Analysis Region Defines the center of the frequency span for the analysis region It is defined as an off set from the center frequency Remote command CALCulate AR FREQuency DELTa on page 197 Time Gate Length Analysis Region Defines the absolute length of the time gate that is the duration or height of the analysis region Remote command CALCulate AR TIME
270. lt Percentage gt Example Manual operation Analyzing Transient Effects Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit 96 DISP WIND SGR COL LOW 10 Sets the start of the color map to 1096 See Start Stop on page 114 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe Shape This command defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display Parameters Shape Manual operation Shape of the color curve Range 1 to 1 RST 0 See Shape on page 114 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor UPPer Percentage This command defines the end point of the color map Parameters Percentage Example Manual operation Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit 96 DISP WIND SGR COL UPP 95 Sets the start of the color map to 9596 See Start Stop on page 114 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram COLor STYLe lt ColorScheme gt This command selects the color scheme User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 230 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 10 11 6 10 1 Analyzing Transient Effects Parameters lt ColorScheme gt HOT Uses a color range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low lev els red colors indicate high ones COLD Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low lev els blue colors indicate high ones RADar
271. lue for the hop states from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin lt QueryRange gt Returns the begin times from the Results table for the specified hop s The begin time is the relative time in ms from the capture start at which the signal first enters the tolerance area of a nominal hop within the analysis region Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Hop Begin on page 40 I User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 262 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis DEE Retrieving Results SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe JHOP TIMing BEGin MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing BEGin SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the begin time from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI l
272. lysis time span on page 88 CALCulate AR TIME PERCent STATe lt State gt If activated the length of the time gate that is the duration or height of the analysis region is defined as a percentage of the full measurement time using CALCulate AR TIME PERCent on page 198 Parameters lt ON OFF gt lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Linked analysis time span on page 88 CALCulate AR TIME STARt lt StartTime gt Defines the starting point of the time span for the analysis region The starting point is defined as a time offset from the capture start time Parameters lt StartTime gt Default unit S Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Time Gate Start on page 88 EE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 198 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis aS a M ee ee me Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps 11 4 12 Adjusting Settings Automatically The following remote commands are required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment SENSeADIUSHE EVE M 199 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and mea
273. m one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter
274. mand defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Band K A KA Q U VJE W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 72 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 168 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A EET E E E E E e e LLLLIIod uo GCOALoLALALLLALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLLLLLALLLAAAALLATLAT AL
275. mands to Perform Transient Analysis Common Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In the Transient Analysis application the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description lt m gt 1 16 Marker lt n gt 1 16 Window or Evaluation lt t gt 1 6
276. marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker Position X value on page 119 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values Position Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only LEE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 235 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 10 2 Analyzing Transient Effects CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI
277. markercmzUNk senten nnns inia nn nnne 234 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m1 gt LINK TOMAbkercm z sentent 234 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz ME 234 CAL Culate nz DEIL TamarkercmztSTATel nnne rt nan 234 CAL Culate lt p gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt TRAQ6 1 directa eese n detta ce nh nnda SNE qe n aya dac Rana ASA 235 FE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 231 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis SS ee aes Analyzing Transient Effects GALGOulatesmesDEETamafKePelmim EE 235 CALCulatesn DELTamarkerem X RELVE a oderit rade ehh da haa DR Roa Ran YD d nach NN 235 CAL GOulatesnDELETatarKersmo EE 236 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt State This command links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt marker lt m1 gt changes its hori zontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters
278. measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp rate deviation from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Chirp State Deviation on page 43 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror MAXimum lt QueryRange gt EN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 268 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem S M I M sex Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency CHERror SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the chirp rate deviation from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency lt QueryRange gt Returns theaverage frequency from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detec
279. measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important Cu currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed ME when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus 0 00 dBm Freq 3 25GHz Meas Time 350 ys Model Hor Overview 10 dB Meas BW z a 500 Hz SRate 600 0 MHz Transient Analysis Signal Model Input Signal States Center Freq Meas BW Min Dwell Tm Ref Level Source Sample Rate Max Dwell Tm att Level Meas Time Timing Auto Preamp Offset Record Len Signal Description Input Frontend Data Acquisition ii Measurement Analysis Result Config Display Config AR Delta Trace 1 AR Bandwidth Detector AR Start Marker 1 AR Length EERU LETITE 3 Full Spectrogram User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 56 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration b T aa Configuration Overview In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 6 3 Signal Desc
280. ment use the following com mand CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNt ccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 275 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt LENGIh 20 cceceeeeeeeeeeee cece eee ee eee aeaeaaa aaa edeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeees 276 CT d KE 276 EE EE EE 276 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNt This command queries the number of frames that are contained in the selected result display depends on the evaluation basis Return values lt Frames gt The maximum number of frames depends on the history depth Range 1 to history depth Increment 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode LAY REPL 2 SGR Replaces the result display in window 2 by a spectrogram DISP WIND2 EVAL REG Defines the analysis region as the evaluation basis for the spec trogram in window 2 CALC SGR FRAM COUN Queries the number of frames in the spectrogram based on the analysis region Usage Query only I User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 275 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis X a en Pm ques Retrieving Results DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt LENGth Queries the trace length for the specified trace in the specified window Return values lt TraceLength gt Number of measurement points for the trace Example DISP WIND TRAC LENG Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA lt Trace gt This command queries current trace data and m
281. ment time Sweep Count 20 Number of sweeps set Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier status Number of Windows 6 Number of result displays Window section User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 286 R amp S FSW K60 Reference ASCII File Export Format File contents Window 1 Full RF Time Domain Description Window number and type Trace section Trace 1 Trace number Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode x Axis Linear x axis scaling mode Start Freq 0 s x axis start value Stop Freq 0 00035 s x axis stop value x Unit s x axis unit y Axis Linear y axis scaling mode Level Range 0 0010 dBm y axis range per division Ref Position 100 0000 96 y axis reference position Ref Value 113 97900 dBm y Unit dBm y axis reference value y axis unit Data section Values 1001 Number of rows of measured values in the table 0 113 97937774658203125 0 113 97937774658203125 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 Measured values lt x value gt lt y value gt 287 R amp S FSW K60 List of Commands List of Commands SENS IDEMod EMVE TYPE iii iere asst Ea Ei a aan bere pet eeu ba fearon een 196 IEN Ge TIulNDow nz DE TechorGlEUNGCHonl AUTO 224 SENSe WINDow n DETector trace F UNCtion esee 223 SENSe WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram DETector FUNCtion
282. mes for the current measurement are determined auto matically However you can define minimum or maximum dwell times or both man ually in order to detect only specific hops for example Frequency Chirping Frequency chirping is similar to hopping however instead of switching to discrete fre quencies the frequency varies with time at a particular chirp rate Transient analysis with the R amp S FSW application and the additional R amp S FSW K60C option is restricted to the commonly used inear FM chirp signals In this case the nominal chirp switches to discrete values referred to as the chirp states User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 20 Signal Models 2 Full Spectrogram pA CF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 80 0 MHz Frame 0 Fig 4 6 Typical spectrogram of a chirped signal The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application can automatically detect chirps in a mea sured signal and determine characteristic chirp parameters Both pulsed and continu ous wave chirp signals can be analyzed Obviously if you consider the chirps rather than the individual frequencies the mea sured data from chirped signals is very similar to hopped signals and thus the analysis tasks and the characteristic parameters are very similar as well Sailing Tolerance 3 4 ee MR MD m mers PEN Meese Chirp Rate vs Time Chirp End m Chirp Begin hirp Length Chirp Rate Hz us lt Nominal Chirp Rate Time s Fig 4 7 Par
283. mmands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage SCPI confirmed INITiate CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using INIT CONT OFF or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped LE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 200 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis SSS H M E Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps As opposed to 1N1Tiate 1MMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 95 INITiate CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode
284. n be configured in the Traces dialog box Trace Data Export tab Alternatively they are available in the Save Recall menu gt Export softkey which is ES displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the toolbar Traces Trace Data Export Copy Trace Export all Traces and all Table Results Indude Instrument Measurement Settings Trace to Export Decimal Separator Point Export Trace to ASCII File Export all Traces and all Table Results reet rnnt hne nnns 109 Include Instrument Measurement Gettngs AA 109 Traceto EKG ONT P aaa 110 Decimal Separ ItO EE 110 Export Trace to ASCII EE 110 Export all Traces and all Table Results Selects all displayed traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker table etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file Alternatively you can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 278 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for result data Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 278 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 109 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis 7 6 7 6 1 Spectrogram Settings
285. nal In MSRA MSRT mode define the application data instead see chapter 4 9 Tran sient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode on page 35 e Measurement Bandwidth the amount of signal bandwidth to be captured e Measurement Time how long the input signal is to be captured 5 Select the Measurement button and configure the expected signal characteristics e Inthe Signal Model tab select the Chirp signal model e Inthe Signal Detection tab define the known chirp states and the conditions for detection See chapter 6 3 2 Signal Detection Signal States on page 58 In the Frequency and Power subtabs define which parts of the chirp will be considered when calculating frequency and power parameters e Inthe Analysis Region tab define the frequency range and time gate within the captured data which is to be analyzed that is which chirps are to be detected See Analysis Region N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 129 R amp S FSW K60 How to Perform Transient Analysis 8 1 10 11 How to Configure the Color Mapping If necessary filter out unwanted signals using an FM video filter Demod Config softkey Select the Result Config button and configure the data basis for evaluation and display e Inthe Result Range tab define the area of the chirp to be analyzed in the result display Define the area by a reference point a length and its alignment in relation to the chirp s center or edges See
286. nalysis bandwidth on page 88 CALCulate AR FREQuency PERCent STATe lt State gt If activated the width of the frequency span for the analysis region is defined as a per centage of the full capture buffer using CALCulate AR FREQuency PERCent on page 197 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Linked analysis bandwidth on page 88 CALCulate AR TIME LENGth Length Defines the length of the time gate that is the duration or height of the analysis region Parameters Length Default unit S Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 eM S User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 197 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis a Configuring Transient Analysis Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Time Gate Length on page 88 CALCulate AR TIME PERCent lt TimePercent gt For CALCulate AR TIME PERCent STATe TRUE the length of the time gate that is the duration or height of the analysis region is defined as a percentage of the full measurement time The time gate start is the start of the capture buffer plus an offset defined by CALCulate AR TIME STARt on page 198 Parameters lt TimePercent gt percentage of the full measurement time Manual operation See Linked ana
287. nce around a defined nominal value for instance or a minimum or maxi mum dwell time in which the frequency remains steady User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 19 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics Frequency Hz Hop End Hop Begin Signal Models Settling Tolerance FM vs Time 3 X Switching E Time Dwell Time eyes doy Aouanbas4 Nominal Hop Freq 4 3 2 Time s Fig 4 5 Parameters required to detect hops Nominal Frequency Values Hop States The nominal frequency values the carrier is expected to hop to are defined in advance Each such level is considered to be a hop state The hop states are defined as frequency offsets from the center frequency A tolerance span can be defined to compensate for settling effects As long as the deviation remains within the tolerance above or below the nominal frequency the hop state is detected The nominal frequency levels are numbered consecutively in the Hop States table see chapter 6 3 2 Signal Detection Signal States on page 58 starting at 0 The state index of the corresponding nominal frequency level is assigned to each detected hop in the measured signal results Dwell Time Conditions The dwell time is the time the signal remains in the tolerance area of a nominal hop frequency or in other words the duration of a hop from beginning to end In a default measurement useful dwell ti
288. ncy AVGFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe JHOP FREQuency AVGFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror lt QueryRange gt Returns the frequency deviation from the Results table for the specified hop s I User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 257 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Lee E e M M M M Ty Retrieving Results Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Hop State Deviation on page 40 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERror SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the frequency deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL
289. ne eene eene nns nennt nent nt nenne 192 CAL CulateCHbRDeiechon POuWerRtterence eene nennen nennen nnns nennt nen nn 192 CAL Gulate CHRDetection SELected indini aaiae iind iiien ce goa icd bales sea gu gu peek ese CALCulateCHb Deiechon GTATes AUTO CALCulateCHh Deiechhon GTATeslDATAl nnne nennen nennen tnnnts tinent stets enn rne sen CALCulate CHRDetection TABLE COLUMIO eterne nnns ennt nt nnn tn ren nt stets enne CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults zi CAL e EEN EREECHEN 267 CALCulate HOPDetection DWELI AUTO eeseeeeseeee eee eene eene naeh EAEE a ap eai 188 CAL Culate HOb eiechton DVWELTMANimum enne enne nnne rn nnrtn senes nnne nnns 188 CALCulate HOPDetection DWELI MINimUm sesseeeseseeeeneneennnene ener ennnen enhn e nnne snnt rers enne nnn 189 CAL CulateHObPDeiechon FbREOuencv ENG 193 CALCulate HOPDetection F REQuency OFFSet BEGin essere ener 193 CALCulate HOPDetection F REQuency OFFSet END essent rennen nennt 194 CALCulate HOPDetection F REQuency REFerence esses nnne rennen nnnee teretes 194 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer LENGth 194 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin sss ener eren 195 CAL Culate HObeiechon POWer OEFGeCEND ener ennern nennen nnns terns nnne nna 195 CAL Culate HObieiechon POuWerRtterence eene entere entren nnne n nnn nnn nnn inna 195 CAL CulateHObtetechion GEI eched AAA 215
290. nennt nnn 192 CALOCulate HOPDetection FREQuency LENGIh eese nennen nnne 193 CAL Culate HObeiechon FROuencv OFF Get BE Gm 193 CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet END eeesssseiee eese tenen nnne 194 CAL Culate HOb etechon FROuencv Rterence ene nene nne 194 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer LENGIh eeeeeseseeseee nennen nennen nnne nnns 194 CALOCulate HOPDetection POWer OFFSet BE Gin 195 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer OFFSet END eese 195 CAL Culate HObtetechon POWerREterence nhe nnennennns 195 CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency LENGth Percent Defines the length of the measurement range for frequency results in percent of the chirp length This command is only available if the reference is CENT see CALCulate CHRDetection POWer REFerence on page 192 Parameters Percent percent of the chirp length Range 0 to 100 RST 100 Example CALC CHRD FREQ LENG 10 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 190 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis SSS MM MH STs Configuring Transient Analysis Manual operation See Length on page 93 CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin Time Defines the beginning of the measurement range for power results as an offset in sec onds from the chirp start This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate CHRDetection FREQu
291. nes the beginning of the measurement range as an offset in seconds from the hop start This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate HOPDetection POWer REFerence on page 195 Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC HOPD POW OFFS 50 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 93 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer OFFSet END time Defines the end of the measurement range as an offset in seconds from the hop end This command is only available if the reference is EDGE see CALCulate HOPDetection POWer REFerence on page 195 Parameters Time Default unit S Example CALC HOPD POW OFFS 50 Manual operation See Offset Begin Offset End on page 93 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer REFerence Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the frequency power measurement range Setting parameters Reference CENTer EDGE EDGE The measurement range is defined in reference to the hop ris ing or falling edge see CALCulate HOPDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin on page 195 and CALCulate HOPDetection POWer OFFSet END on page 195 CENTer The measurement range is defined in reference to the center of the hop Example CALC HOPD POW REF EDGE Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Reference on page 92 Configuring Demodulation SE
292. nfigure the Color Mapping The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs The settings for color mapping are defined in the Color Mapping dialog box To dis play this dialog box do one of the following Tap the color map in the spectrogram display Press the Color Mapping softkey in the Spectrogram menu LEE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 130 R amp S FSW K60 How to Perform Transient Analysis How to Configure the Color Mapping To select a color scheme You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values gt Inthe Color Mapping dialog box select the option for the color scheme to be used Editing the value range of the color map The distribution of the measured values is displayed as a histogram in the Color Map ping dialog box To cover the entire measurement value range make sure the first and last bar of the histogram are included To ignore noise in a spectrogram for example exclude the lower power levels from the histogram The value range of the color map must cover at least 10 of the value range on the horizontal axis of the diagram that means the difference between the start and stop values must be at least 10 The value range can be set numerically or graphically To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders 1 Select and drag the bottom color curve slider indicated by a gray box at the left of the color curve pane to
293. ngs for Transient Analysis When you switch a measurement channel to the Transient Analysis application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application e center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset e attenuation e input coupling e YIG filter state ERREUR RE I E EE E E e e LeALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLU U U LULULULUUSSSSJ User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 55 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Configuration Overview After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after a measurement channel has been set to the Transient Analysis application or after a Preset Channel Table 6 1 Default settings for Transient channels Parameter Value Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Trigger offset 0 Signal model none Measurement bandwidth maximum possible depends on installed bandwidth options Measurement time 350 us Sample rate maximum possible depends on installed bandwidth options Analysis region Entire capture buffer Evaluations Window 1 RF Power Time Domain full capture buffer Window 2 Spectrogram full capture buffer 6 2 Configuration Overview NN Throughout the
294. nne nn 217 CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe COLumn State lt Header gt lt Header gt This command enables or disables columns in all chirp results and statistics tables Note that only the enabled columns are returned for the CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe RESults query Setting parameters lt State gt ON OFF Enables or disables all subsequently listed headers ON Provides results for the defined lt Headers gt only OFF Provides results for all table parameters except the specified lt Headers gt RST ON SS User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 216 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Analyzing Transient Effects Headers ALL STATe BEGin LENGth RATe CHERror FREQuency MAXFm RMSFm AVGFm AVGPower All listed parameters are displayed or hidden in the table results depending on the State parameter ALL See chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 42 STATe Chirp state BEGin Chirp Begin LENGth Chirp length RATe Chirp rate CHERror Chirp state deviation FREQuency Average frequency MAXFm Maximum Frequency Deviation RMSFm RMS Frequency Deviation AVGFm Average Frequency Deviation AVGPower Average power Example CALC CHRD TABL COL ON CHRNo STATe Provides results for the chirp number and chirp state only Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Exampl
295. of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 96 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 199 E User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 96 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis Display Configuration 7 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured via the Analysis button in the Overview They are identical to the analy sis functions in the base unit except for the special window functions e Display Configuration uiia cerea te n e andenedadsdecdeestacnaedes aes 97 e e TE EE 97 Evaluation Basis LP 104 Trace SS UAGS riiin D m
296. olution bandwidth on page 17 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow lt n gt RATio on page 185 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 89 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration SS ee SS SS aS a Bandwidth Settings FFT Window In the Transient Analysis application you can select one of several FFT window types The following window types are available Blackman Harris Flattop Gauss Rectangular Hanning Hamming Chebyshev Remote command SENSe SWEep FFT WINDow TYPE on page 229 Measurement Bandwidth The measurement bandwidth and Sample Rate are interdependent and define the range of data to be captured For information on supported sample rates and band widths see the data sheet Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 183 FM Video Bandwidth Additional filters applied after demodulation help filter out unwanted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals e Relative low pass filters Relative filters 3 dB can be selected in of the analysis demodulation band width The filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidths e None deactivates the FM video bandwidth default Remote command SENSe DEMod FMVF TYPE on page 196 Time Resolution The time resolution determines the size of the bins used for each FFT calculation The shorter the time span used for each FFT the shor
297. omain Wrapped e Chirp Rate Time Domain Find out more about trace evaluation e Mapping Samples to Measurement Points with the Trace Detector 26 e Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode t dice tms 28 e RE 29 Mapping Samples to Measurement Points with the Trace Detector A trace displays the values measured at the measurement points The number of sam ples taken during a measurement is much larger than the number of measurement points that are displayed in the measurement trace Obviously a data reduction must be performed to determine which of the samples are displayed for each measurement point This is the trace detector s task The trace detector can analyze the measured data using various methods EE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 26 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Basics Trace Evaluation The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace information by an abbreviation Table 4 1 Detector types Detector Abbrev Description Positive Peak Pk Determines the largest of all positive peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point Negative Peak Mi Determines the smallest of all negative peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point Auto Peak Ap Combines the peak detectors determines the maximum and the minimum value of
298. ombine overlapping FFT frames for the spectrogram result display Sum Calculates the sum of all values in one sample point Average Calculates the linear average of all values in one sample point RMS Calculates the RMS of all values in one sample point Maximum Determines the largest of all values in one sample point Minimum Determines the minimum of all values in one sample point Sample Selects the last measured value for each sample point Remote command SENSe WINDow lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram DETector FUNCtion on page 228 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only fora channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 201 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RU
299. on Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC2 MARK LINK ON Manual operation See Linked Markers on page 121 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search The following commands control the marker search CAL Culate nzM Abker DE NCursion eene nn nnne nnn russa annes sana 237 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion Excursion This command defines the peak excursion The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Manual operation See Peak Excursion on page 123 Positioning the Marker The following remote commands are required to position the marker on a trace Positioning Markers EE 237 e Positioning Delta MAarkels c cccccccccereisceccoaassenscanstcceaceesbansaaccanaaceddcesteannetenanedecies 239 Positioning Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiIMUM LEFT ccccssscccescececesceceeseeecneeeceeseeeeeeeeeeaneeeees 237 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT 238 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm MANimumf PDEAK nnne nnne 238 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzM AximumbRlGHt eese ss asses nnns asesoria 238 CAL Culate nz M Abkermmz MiNimum LEET 238 CAL Culate nz M Abker mz MiNimumNENT seen nns n nnne aas sse sni 238 CALOCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK eese nnne nennen 239 CAL Culate nz M bker mmz MiNimum BIG 239 CALCulate lt n gt
300. on Remote command CALCulate RESult RANGe AUTO on page 214 Result Range Reference Point Defines the reference point for positioning the result range The Offset is given with respect to this value Rise The result range is defined in reference to the rising edge Center The result range is defined in reference to the center of the pulse top Fall The result range is defined in reference to the falling edge Remote command CALCulate RESult REFerence on page 214 Offset The offset in seconds from the pulse edge or center at which the result range reference point occurs Remote command CALCulate RESult OFFSet on page 214 Alignment Defines the alignment of the result range in relation to the selected Result Range Ref erence Point Left The result range starts at the pulse center or selected edge Center The result range is centered around the pulse center or selected edge Right The result range ends at the pulse center or selected edge Remote command CALCulate RESult ALIGnment on page 213 Length Defines the length or duration of the result range Remote command CALCulate RESult LENGth on page 213 Table Configuration During each measurement a large number of statistical and characteristic values are determined The Hop Chirp Statistics and Hop Chirp Results tables display an over view of the parameters selected here Note that the table configuration applies to
301. on page 172 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 172 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 74 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Input Output and Frontend Settings Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the R amp S FSW hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting
302. op number 7 1 Hop Results Dwell Switching Avg Max FM RMS FM Avg FM ID Hop State Time Time Frequency Deviation Deviation Deviation No Index ms mei kHz kHz kHz 0 20 9 E S Hop Spectrogram 7 Fig 9 4 Results for a single hop By default both the Frequency Deviation and the Spectrogram displays show 100 of the dwell time of the selected hop To analyze settling effects using a VBW filter One possibility to remove noise from the Frequency Deviation trace is using a video filter with a smaller VBW 1 From the Bandwidth menu select FM Video BW 2 Asthe FM Video Bandwidth select Low Pass 196 BW Note the impact on the Frequency Deviation trace Settling effects on the hop FM are now clearly visible 1 Hop Results Ho State Switching Avg Max FM RMS FM Avg FM ID Re Index Time Frequency Deviation Deviation Deviation gt ms kHz kHz kHz kHz 3 s 3 Hop Spectrogram 5 1 243510051 ms 1001 H 1 443540049 ms CF 4 0205 GHz 1001 pts Meas BW 5 0 MHz Frame 0 Fig 9 5 Effect of the FM video bandwidth User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 137 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Example Chirped FM Signal To analyze settling effects by defining a result range Another possibility to analyze the settling effects is by defining a result range Move the result range to the hop begin to see the settling in more detail 1 From the Meas Config menu select Result Config 2 Inthe Result
303. or 1 4 irren Measurement range BASICS COMMOUMING 2 22 22 6 cocta eret irn tente e ce emeret Example e LEE ELE Parameters heic Hn Eu vs result range Measurement time ssseseseeeene User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 299 R amp S FSW K60 Index Minimum Marker positioning sseeeseeeeeeee 124 Next E e 124 Mixer Type External Mixer B21 sssssseeess 65 MKR KEY zie hic either redi e ues tera ct 118 MKR gt KEY roor M R RU 122 123 MSRA EE 125 Analysis interval eese 86 183 Operating mode vsere is 35 Deng P 81 176 MSRA applications Capt re offset E 85 Capture offset remote sssssssssssssss 251 MSRT PNE Ge M Analysis interval m Operating mode sess 35 Een eT 81 176 MSRT applications Capt re offset 2 nrc it ecce 85 Capture offset remote sssssssssssssss 253 Multiple ZOOM inito t enter erre brc rhe pente 124 N Negative Peak detector eene 26 Next Minimum Marker positioning eene 124 kill 124 Next Peak Marker positioning eene 124 cllc E 124 Noise SOURCE 78 o Offset Analysis interval
304. ou also define the frame number when activating a new marker If no frame number is specified the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame Special search functions are provided for spectrogram markers In the spectrum result display only the markers positioned on the currently selected frame are visible In Continuous Sweep mode this means that only markers posi tioned on frame 0 are visible To view markers that are positioned on a frame other than frame 0 in the spectrum result display you must stop the measurement and select the corresponding frame Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA or MSRT operating mode The main difference between the two modes is that in MSRA mode an UO analyzer performs data acquisition while in MSRT mode a realtime measurement is performed to capture data In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master actually captures data the MSRA MSRT applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application in MSRA MSRT operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured
305. ou have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 201 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 52 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker AOFF This command turns all delta markers off E User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 233 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Deeg Analyzing Transient Effects Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker m to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker m changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt State This command links delta marker m1 to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker m2 delta marker m1 changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters
306. ower level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 174 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 175 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 If option R amp S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on p
307. p Rate Time Domain e iAP Clrw 300 0 us 1001 pts 800 0 us The chirp rate time domain trace is determined as follows Chirp Rate Det Time Domain Trace Data IQ Data gn FM zz dE BW E FM Demodulator Analysis Region Fiter Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CRT see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 Hop Chirp Results Table Displays the automatically detected hop chirp parameters in a table of results This dis play requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H Which parameters are displayed depends on the Result Configuration see chap ter 7 2 2 Table Configuration on page 99 The currently selected hop chirp is highlighted blue The hops chirps contained in the current capture buffer are highligh ted green 3 Hop Results Hop Dwell Switching Avg Frequency Max FM RMS FM Begin Time Time Frequency Deviation Deviation Deviation ms ms ms kHz kHz kHz kHz Hop State No Index ID Fig 5 7 Hop Results Table For details on the individual parameters see chapter 5 1 Hop Parameters on page 38 or chapter 5 2 Chirp Parameters on page 42 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH RTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 Hop Chirp Statistics Table Displays statistical values minimum maximum average standard deviation for the measured hop chirp parameters in a table of results This display requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H EM User Manual 1175 6478 02
308. page 43 See Average Frequency on page 44 See Frequency Deviation Peak on page 44 See Frequency Deviation RMS on page 44 See Frequency Deviation Average on page 44 See Average Power on page 45 CALCulate CHRDetection TOTal This command returns the total number of chirps found Return values lt TotalChirps gt Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the average Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified chirp s N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 267 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis b I Retrieving Results Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation Average on page 44 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency AVGFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire
309. points on page 108 SENSe STATistic TYPE lt Statistic Type Defines which hops chirps are included in the statistical evaluation Parameters lt Statistic Type gt SELected ALL SELected Only the selected hop chirp from each sweep capture is inclu ded in the statistical evaluation ALL All measured hops chirps from each sweep capture are inclu ded in the statistical evaluation Manual operation See Selected Hop Selected Chirp vs All Hops All Chirps on page 108 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached SSS VY a User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 224 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 8 Analyzing Transient Effects Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 95 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent This query returns the current number of started sweeps or measurements
310. pture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation Peak on page 41 SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency MAXFm SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the maximum Frequency Deviation from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only TEMNE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 259 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pem c UK M M M sexi Retrieving Results SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the RMS Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation RMS on page 41 SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP FREQuency RMSFm MINimum lt QueryRange gt
311. quency Offset Chirp E 60 Hein c 60 inserting a signal Slate ce e ee Euer dn eR RR ERR ea 60 Daleung a Signal TE 60 Clearing the signal state Goble AAA 60 saving the signal state ET 60 Hl 61 HE 1 re pH 61 L Mining I E EE 61 E 1 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 59 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration mm N ERE Signal Description Auto Mode By default the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application performs an automatic hop chirp detection according to the measured data For an initial overview of the signal at hand this detection is usually sufficient For more accurate results particularly if the input signal is known in advance the signal detection settings can be adapted as required For details see chapter 4 3 3 Automatic vs Manual Hop Chirp State Detection on page 21 Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection STATes AUTO on page 187 CALCulate HOPDetection STATes AUTO on page 189 Hop Chirp State Index The nominal frequency levels are numbered consecutively in the Hop States Chirp States table starting at O The state index of the corresponding nominal frequency level is assigned to each detected hop chirp in the measured signal Frequency Offset Chirp
312. quisition and Analysis Region Measurement Bandwidth The measurement bandwidth and Sample Rate are interdependent and define the range of data to be captured For information on supported sample rates and band widths see the data sheet Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 183 Sample Rate The Measurement Bandwidth and sample rate are interdependent and define the range of data to be captured For information on supported sample rates and band widths see the data sheet Remote command SENSe SRATe on page 184 Measurement Time The measurement time and Record Length are interdependent and define the amount of data to be captured The maximum measurement time in the R amp S FSW Transient application is limited only by the available memory memory limit reached message is shown in status bar Note however that increasing the measurement time and thus reducing the available memory space may restrict the number of measurement channels that can be activa ted simultaneously on the R amp S FSW Remote command SENSe MTIMe on page 184 Record Length The Measurement Time and record length are interdependent and define the amount of data to be captured The maximum record length in the R amp S FSW Transient application is limited only by the available memory memory limit reached message is shown in status bar Note however that increasing the record length and thus reducing the availab
313. r B21 sese 68 sio p Nee 97 Analysis interval C Configuration MSRA remote ssssssss 251 Configuration MSRA MSRT remote 249 Capture offset MSRAIMSRT ou ccccccccccccccccececeeceesecerseseseees MSRA applications 0 0 0 eee cece eee etee ree eeeeees 85 MSRA MSRT mode sesseeseesessesseeseesessesseeneeneeneees MSRT applications EE 85 Analysis line Remote ente bare x s dE e 251 253 Configuration occisi 125 Softkey 85 Configuration MSRA remote s s s 251 Center frequency ENEE 74 Configuration MSRA MSRT remote 249 Softkey 74 MSRA MSRT mode Step SIZO soci M M 74 Analysis region c c ccscscesessssessssesessesessestsesesestesesesseseess Channel bar Basics sss ce cs itio ue 12 Configuring Chirp detection Evaluation basis cte ect Configuring 58 Frequency bandwidth sees 88 How to sseses 129 Frequency delta Frequency span Length PX Parameters REMOTE ese csecvseccesevectlvsccnencsteiaeeedestveiteesdesapedenio dek Time gate Visualizing ASCII trace export Asynchronous Data processilg enira 16 Attenualtiol wid seve rre e ne nerd haie o Electronic m Ma ual Option B25 cone eate cire 77 Protective remote A 156 Auto ID External Mixer B21 remote control
314. r event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt For external and time domain trigger sources you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it SS M User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 179 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Parameters lt Type gt Example Manual operation Configuring Transient Analysis POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive TRIG SLOP NEG See Slope on page 84 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce lt Source gt This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoi
315. r Settings on page 118 e Configure the Spectrogram display or FFT parameters on the Spectrogram tab see chapter 7 6 Spectrogram Settings on page 110 11 Optionally export the trace data of the demodulated signal to a file L User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 127 R amp S FSW K60 How to Perform Transient Analysis a Inthe Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK To detect hops in a transient measurement This procedure requires the additional option R amp S FSW K60H to be installed 1 2 3 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the Transient application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Transient Analysis Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency Select the Data Acquisition button and define the bandwidth parameters for the input signal In MSRA MSRT mode define the application data instead see chapter 4 9 Tran sient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode on page 35 e Measurement Bandwidth the amount of signal bandwidth to be captured e Measurement Time how long the input signal is to be captured Select the Measurement button and configure the expected signal characteristics e Inthe Signal Model tab select the Hop signal model e Inthe Signal De
316. r sampling in the time domain Windowing helps minimize the discontinuities at the end of the measured sig nal interval and thus reduces the effect of spectral leakage increasing the frequency resolution Additional filters can be applied after demodulation to filter out unwanted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals Asynchronous data processing During a measurement in the R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application the data is captured and stored in the capture buffer until the defined measurement time has expired As soon as a minimum amount of data is available the first FFT calculation is performed As soon as the required number of overlapping FFT results is available defined by the sweep count the detector function is applied to the data and the first frame is displayed in the Spectrogram and any other active result displays Capture Buffer 4 MMeasurement Time 1 Capture lt li Spectrogram Buffer eunjde au 1ueueunsee A Fig 4 1 Signal processing calculating one spectrogram frame Shortly after the measurement time is over the final results are displayed and the mea surement is complete Due to this asynchronous processing initial analysis results are available very quickly At the same time the data is captured over the full bandwidth entirely without gaps The following figure illustrates how the capture and result display processes are perfo
317. ral shorter hop chirps of a different hop chirp state are Ge EE 145 One or more shorter hops chirps are detected directly before or after the desired hop le M 145 Spectrogram of a selected hop chirp is empty ennn nnn 145 Too many hop chirp states have been detected in auto mode Switch auto mode off and edit hop chirp state table manually see chapter 6 3 2 Sig nal Detection Signal States on page 58 Usually these unwanted hop chirp states will not appear in the Results Table The desired hop chirp states are not detected Make sure that a sufficient number of hops chirps are inside the analysis region see Analysis Region Instead of one hop chirp several shorter hop chirps of the same hop chirp state are detected Increase the detection tolerance of the corresponding hop chirp state see Tolerance on page 60 Use a video filter with a smaller VBW see FM Video Bandwidth on page 90 Instead of one hop chirp several shorter hop chirps of a different hop chirp state are detected Adjust the detection tolerance of the corresponding hop chirp states to make sure that tolerance ranges do not overlap see Tolerance on page 60 Use a video filter with a smaller VBW see FM Video Bandwidth on page 90 One or more shorter hops chirps are detected directly before or after the desired hop chirp Specify a minimum and maximum dwell time chirp length corresponding to th
318. rameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 62 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 63 EGREDITUR E SSS User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 156 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 4 1 2 Configuring Transient Analysis INPut FILTer YIG STATe lt State gt This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 63 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 63 INPut IMPedance Impedance This
319. rement range is defined in reference to the center of the hop chirp Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 191 CALCulate CHRDetection POWer REFerence on page 192 CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency REFerence on page 194 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer REFerence on page 195 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 92 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration BESSERES FM Video Bandwidth Length Defines the length or duration of the frequency power measurement range Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency LENGth on page 190 CALCulate CHRDetection POWer LENGth on page 192 CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency LENGth on page 193 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer LENGth on page 194 Offset Begin Offset End The offset in seconds from the beginning or end of the Reference Remote command CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin on page 191 CALCulate CHRDetection FREQuency OFFSet END on page 191 CALCulate CHRDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin on page 192 CALCulate CHRDetection POWer OFFSet END on page 192 CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet BEGin on page 193 CALCulate HOPDetection FREQuency OFFSet END on page 194 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer OFFSet BEGin on page 195 CALCulate HOPDetection POWer OFFSet END on page 195 6 9 FM Video Bandwidth A video filter applied during demodulation can filter out unwanted sign
320. results e SDEV standard deviation of the results e Retrieving Information on Detected Hops 253 e Retrieving Information on Detected Chirps eeclesie 264 e Retrieving Tacs Data 275 e Exporting Table Results to an ASCII File eene 277 e Exporting Trace Results eene erre rhe repr ER aa 278 11 9 1 Retrieving Information on Detected Hops The following commands return information on the currently selected or all detected hops User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 253 Retrieving Results CALOCulate HOPDetection TAPBlLebRtGults stent nnns 255 CALGulate HOPDetectianz WO Tal eret rrt LITTERE EI Ru Ete ERR nte Rb EMEN DERE ORE ERES 256 SENSeJHOP FREQuencysAVGRIM 2 2 certet Redoute ARENS 257 ISGENZGeJHObp FREOuencv AVGFm AVEhRage enne nnn nenne nera 257 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm MAXiImUm 2 2 ect tenerae nnn naue nona ana Due ER RRRLA 257 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm MINimutmi 2 Lean ied e Lene e Lender e Den ene ERR ED 257 SENSe HOP FREQuency AVGFm SDEViation eese 257 SENSe HOP FREQuency FMERTOrI eese aaa tnn ne rne aaa 257 SENSe HOP FREOUSnDcy Tee EE 258 SENSe HOP FREQusricy FMERror MAXImUm 2a dani rone ee catene a ii 258 SENSeJHOP PREOUSnCy FMERTFOTMINIDO oon utn ne nent ruere nhe 258 SENSe HOP FREOUSnDEV FMERIor S DEViatiori 2 2 2alccue ca pedet b
321. rigger Settings For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 180 UO Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is used for input It is also not available for analysis bandwidths z 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 180 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For de
322. ription on page 58 2 Input and frontend settings See chapter 6 4 Input Output and Frontend Settings on page 61 3 Triggering See chapter 6 5 Trigger Settings on page 80 4 Data acquisition See chapter 6 6 Data Acquisition and Analysis Region on page 86 5 Measurement settings See chapter 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings on page 91 6 Analysis See chapter 7 Analysis on page 97 7 Result configuration See chapter 7 2 Result Configuration on page 97 8 Display configuration See chapter 7 1 Display Configuration on page 97 The main configuration settings and dialog boxes are also available via the Meas Con fig menu which is displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key To configure settings gt Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box For step by step instructions on configuring a measurement for Transient Analysis see chapter 8 How to Perform Transient Analysis on page 127 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key on the front panel restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 57 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2
323. rker 2 seconds above the position of marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the delta marker search area Parameters lt SearchArea gt VISible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram over all fre quencies Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram over all frequencies User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 245 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis EE Analyzing Transient Effects Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quenc
324. rker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 238 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 240 7 9 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar elio ON RM EE 124 VOSS ZOOM Pm 124 Restore Onginal BI 125 Deactivating Zoom Selection mode iei RE EE SEENEN 125 Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 248 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 247 Multiple Zoom User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 124 R amp S9FSW K60 Analysis a_a S o Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt 200M MULTiple zoom STATe on page 249 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt 2
325. rkers Off Show Marker Legend in Spectrogram On Marker Table Display onere cer titre ERR EEEE EATE e ete ehe t tinh dE ch 121 Linked Markers iiie titt dae tir ege t Ladder caenecenteceevetened TEEN 121 snow Marker Legend in Spectteghelmi 0 citantur ttg euren direc 121 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTAB1e on page 236 Linked Markers If enabled the markers in all diagrams are linked i e when you move a marker in one window the markers in all other windows are moved to the same x value Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer LINK on page 237 Show Marker Legend in Spectrogram Hides or shows marker information within the spectrogram diagram area as opposed to the separate marker table see also Marker Table Display on page 121 This set ting only takes effect if a marker is active User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 121 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis Marker Settings 7 8 3 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily or to use the current marker po
326. rmed asynchronously EE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 16 R amp S9FSW K60 Measurement Basics Deeg Signal Processing Measurement Time seconds 100M Capture Buffer Samples Capture Filling Level 1001 Result Display Buffer Trace Points Result Filling Level Fig 4 2 Asynchronous data processing Multiple spectrograms However after each data acquisition a short delay occurs before the next acquisition can be carried out Thus for measurements for which several spectrograms are required and the capturing process is repeated several times defined by the frame count a short gap in the results between spectrograms can be detected Measurement Time multiple captures Capture Buffer 1 Capture Buffer 2 Capture Buffer 3 seunjdeo ejdnjnuu Sieg eene eui JUsWaINSes Spectrogram History Buffer Fig 4 3 Signal processing calculating several spectrograms Resolution bandwidth The resolution bandwidth RBW has an effect on how the spectrum is measured and displayed It determines the frequency resolution of the measured spectrum and is directly coupled to the selected analysis bandwidth ABW The ABW can be the full measurement bandwidth the bandwidth of the analysis region or the length of the result range depending on the evaluation basis of the result display see chapter 4 4 Basis of Evaluation on page 22 If the ABW is changed the resolution ban
327. rmed over several measurements and displayed The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures See also chapter 4 7 3 Trace Statistics on page 29 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed o If a trace is frozen View mode the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSW automatically adapts the trace data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace 4 7 3 Trace Statistics Each trace represents an analysis of the data measured in one result range As descri bed in chapter 4 7 2 Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode on page 28 statistical evaluations can be performed over several traces that is result ranges Which ranges and how many are evaluated depends on the configuration settings Selected hop chirp vs all hops chirps The Sweep Average Count determines how many measurements are evaluated For each measurement in turn either the selected hop chirp only that is one result range or all detected hops chirps that is possibly several result ranges can be inclu ded in the statisti
328. s 119 Fixed reference remote control 236 Linked etse rent Pen euer 121 Minimum 124 Minimum remote control sseesessss 237 Next minim s s eei eerte rte nns 124 Next minimum remote control 237 Next peak ois bonia eee ente 124 Next peak remote control sssssssse 237 PaK geseent eeh edd 123 Peak remote control 237 zie cio E 119 Positioning 123 Positioning remote control 231 Querying position remote ssssss 233 Remote control 231 Search remote control ssssssssssss 237 Setting up remote control sssssss 231 Spectrograms Spectrograms remote control 241 Ki 119 Step size remote control 236 ebessen cat rinse cott tct tee e He d cette 121 Maximizing Windows remote sessse 206 Measurement bandwidth Data acquisition assisia 87 90 Measurement channel Creating remote ssssssseeee 152 Deleting remote m Querying remote A 153 Renaming remote sssssssseeeees 154 Replacing remote ssssssesesss 152 Measurement examples Chirped signal eren n tnr Ete ket Hopped signal P Result Ce LE Trace averaging EE MBW lr Measurement points Trace detect
329. s current for the low first range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 158 IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 158 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Lee M ss Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 68 SENSe MIXer LOPower Level This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO Level on page 67 SENSe MIXer SIGNal lt State gt This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the UO Analyzer for instance Parameters lt State gt OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 68 See Auto ID on page 68 SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maxim
330. s previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 232 Select Marker Opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly us F NEN Selected State Selected State Selected State ee isum Con Recall octa Con sud SEN Ea a a7 e Toa Ta va o Ea E Con K l oeaio Moon K l betas Boon Kos on sug Deta Non fag Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 232 7 8 2 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark ers E User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 120 R amp S9FSW K60 Analysis O M S M MD M 9 M SDA Marker Settings These settings are located in the Marker Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab Then select the horizontal Marker Settings tab Markers Marker Settings Search Marker Table Auto Linked Ma
331. s to hop from one level to the next It is defined as the time between a hop end and the following hop begin Default unit ms lt FreqAvg gt Average frequency measured within the frequency measure ment range of the hop Default unit kHz User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 255 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis a ee eS RS Retrieving Results lt FreqDev gt Deviation of the hop frequency from the nominal hop state fre quency For details see Hop State Deviation on page 40 Default unit kHz lt FMDevMax gt Maximum deviation of the hop frequency from the nominal hop frequency as defined in the hop States table The deviation is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the hop For details see Frequency Deviation Peak on page 41 Default unit kHz lt FMDevRMS gt RMS deviation of the hop frequency from the nominal linear hop frequency as defined in the hop States table The devia tion is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the hop For details see Frequency Deviation RMS on page 41 Default unit kHz lt FMDevAvg gt Average deviation of the hop frequency from the nominal linear hop frequency as defined in the hop States table The devia tion is calculated within the frequency measurement range of the hop For details see Frequency Deviation Average on page 41 Default unit kHz lt PowAvg gt Average power level measured during a hop Which p
332. sccssscecacosestvcaccscssncectsveteducseronsnsseereusnes 69 LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower on page 159 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 67 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Input Output and Frontend Settings Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the UO Analyzer for instance Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 159 Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calc
333. se commands are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed CAL Culate CHb Detechon LENG AUTO 186 CAL Culate CHb Detechon LENG MANimum eene nnne nennen ssa 187 CAL Culate CHb Detechon LENG MihNimum senes nn nnne nennen nannten nin 187 CAL CulateCHb Detechon GTATes AU 187 CALCulate CHRDetection STATes DATA 188 CAL GCUlate HOPDetecti n iDWEEPbALDTUO 1 pietre eset oor oap rene hed healt 188 CAL Culate HObDetechon DWELTMANimum senes nn nennt nnns sans nn nana 188 CALCulate HOPDetection DWELI MiNimum nennen inermes nenne ais 189 CAL Gulate HOPDletection STATES AUTO oiia vo rie eorr ENEE AER 189 CALOCulate HOPDetection STATes DATA 189 CALCulate CHRDetection LENGth AUTO State This command activates and deactivates the auto length setting for chirp detection EN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 186 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis un m_a Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CALC CHRD LENG AUTO ON Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Manual operation See Auto Mode on page 61 CALCulate CHRDetection LENGth MAXimum Time This command sets the maximum time for chirp detection Note this command is only available for manual timing mode see CALCulate CHRDetection LENGth AUTO on page 186 P
334. sese CALCulate n2 MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELOW esee CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT seen CAL Culate cnz MAh kercmz GGbamlGbtCrooram v MAximumf PDEART CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOWe sss CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELoOw eene CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT sse CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MlINimum PEAK sese CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe T e Reus MARKES M gt 233 VE Ber TEEN ette sennie tht dn naa rk nhe oaa ar AE eee ria eae ERR aeu ee rade 233 CAlCulate cnzMAbkercmztGTATel nnne nennen re nnnn nens enn it reete enne ennr nn 232 CAL Culate nzM Abkerm 1z LUINKTOMARkercm z nennen enne nnne 232 CALCulate n SGRam CLEALE 1 rettet etr end Di e la i ncn ropa donne daa rna dna nn 225 CAlCulate cnz GGbamlGbtCirooram ERAMe COUNG nennen nennen nennen 275 CAL Culatecnz GGbamlGbtcCrooram ERAMe GEI ect 225 CAL Culatecnz GGbamlGbtcCprooram HDEP ener enne nnne nnns nnns enne CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution ve CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram RE Golutton AUTO 226 CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram TGTamp DATA 227 CALCulate n SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe eese Ee EEN BI
335. settings are available when you select the BW or SPAN key Some of these settings are also available in the Data Acquisition and Analysis Region dialog box ABW RBW FFT Window D 6 MHz bo gt Blackman Harris LEE L Full Spectrogram D PV EE 89 FET uolo e 90 Measurement Bandhwidt sessi nennen nennen nenne nennen nennen 90 FM Video 4Bandwidtli dE ta sent cuc te cota nasa ca eaae a Dx eh etr Crear er eee tdeo da 90 Cellule EROTIC RD TRITT STEM 90 Measurement TII ecce e e Iti ra addi Ra ce ad adi dech aeos cas rd asta Ae e 90 RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest pos sible bandwidth The resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected span see ABW RBW on page 89 For more information see Resolution bandwidth on page 17 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth WINDow n RESolution on page 185 ABW RBW The resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected analysis bandwidth ABW The ABW can be the full measurement bandwidth the bandwidth of the analysis region or the length of the result range depending on the evaluation basis of the result display If the ABW is changed the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting defines the coupling ratio Which coupling ratios are available depends on the selected FFT Window For more information see Res
336. sis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 36 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Basics mEMCIOEMPOGMM u M Y Transient Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode MSRA View MSRA Master Transient Analysis Ref Level 0 00 dBm Freq 1 02 Griz Meas Time Sms Model Hoc Att 10 dB Meas BW 10 0 MHz SRate 2 z IG Bypass 1 Region FM Time Domain t AP Clr 3 Hop FM Tim 0 05 1001 pts 5 0 mee524 319999386 ps 1001 pts 21 99 us 744 239996749 us 2 Full Spectrogram tHop Results Ana Interv Analysis Interva 0 P Hop Dwell Swi Begin Time T ms ms
337. sists of a comma separated list of value pairs one for each possible chirp state Note that the state table can only be configured manually if CALCulate CHRDetection STATes AUTO iS OFF Setting parameters lt ChirpRate gt Default unit HZ lt Tolerance gt Tolerance above or below the nominal chirp rate Default unit HZ Example CALC CHRD STAT 1e6 0 3 1e5 0 4 Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement on page 281 Manual operation See Frequency Offset Chirp Rate on page 60 See Tolerance on page 60 CALCulate HOPDetection DWELI AUTO State This command activates and deactivates the auto dwell setting for hop detection Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CALC HOPD DWEL AUTO ON Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Manual operation See Auto Mode on page 61 CALCulate HOPDetection DWELI MAXimum lt Time gt This command sets the maximum time for hop detection Note this command is only available for manual timing mode see CALCulate HOPDetection DWEL1 AUTO on page 188 Parameters lt Time gt Range 0 to 0 00129822 RST 0 00035 Default unit S IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 188 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pec m ul Configuring Transient Analys
338. sition to define another characteristic value In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Most marker positioning functions and the search settings are available in the MKR gt menu Search settings are also available via the MARKER key or in the vertical Marker Con fig tab of the Analysis dialog box horizontal Search Settings tab e Marker Search Setlngs iiececcseeeiacecnre rine tere khe cte ERR Du retenu Rc inte Enn tera eR then uh 122 LM Positoning FUNCIONS EE 123 7 8 3 1 Marker Search Settings Spectrograms show not only the current sweep results but also the sweep history Thus when searching for peaks you must define the search settings within a single time frame x direction and within several time frames y direction These settings are are available in the Search Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search Settings tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search Settings tab 13 25 GHz Meas Time Markers Marker Settings Search Peak Search Exdude LO On eo calis uil 6 0 dBm Auto Max Peak Auto Min Peak Search Mode for Next Peak n idee nte teer eet exe EN 123 el tet J
339. splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 210 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis REESEN Analyzing Transient Effects LAYout WINDow n ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT
340. surement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 96 11 5 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps When you activate a Realtime Spectrum measurement channel a measurement is started immediately with the default settings However you can start and stop new measurements at any time Capturing data in MSRA MSRT mode In MSRA MSRT mode 1 Q data from the input signal is captured and stored by the MSRA MSRT Master For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Useful commands for configuring and performing sweeps described elsewhere SENSe MT TMe on page 184 SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 224 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent on page 225 SENSe MEASure POINts on page 224 Remote commands exclusive to configuring and performing sweeps ABORU nU mOREEE 200 II Klee E 200 d EE CONTINUOUS ERE 201 INI TiateEIMMegiate conce rete eee ates eei ne acre ea eee 201 DUPRE REP E 201
341. t lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 153 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel See INSTrument LIST on page 153 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activated Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it E User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 152 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Activating Transient Analysis Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the spectrum channel with the name Spectrum4 INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing me
342. t lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt Return values lt NewWindowName gt Example Usage Manual operation String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Query only See RF Spectrum on page 47 See Spectrogram on page 47 See RF Power Time Domain on page 48 See FM Time Domain on page 49 See Frequency Deviation Time Domain on page 50 See PM Time Domain on page 51 See PM Time Domain Wrapped on page 52 See Marker Table on page 52 See Chirp Rate Time Domain on page 53 See Hop
343. t Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Noise SOUE EET 78 THOJE DEE 79 Gen EE 79 ui m HT N 79 L Pulse CU DNE T E TU mM 79 Eo CE oss PNE RR ORE 80 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 78 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration i a Input Output and Frontend Settings External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 171 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 181 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 181 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the outp
344. t QueryRange gt Returns the dwell time from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Dwell Time on page 40 SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP TIMing DWELI MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe JHOP TIMing DWELI SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the hop dwell time from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only EM User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 263 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 9 2 Retrieving Results SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching lt QueryRange gt Returns the switching time from the Results table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Switching Time on page 40 SENSe JHOP TIMing SWITching AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe JHOP TIMing SWITc
345. t in the trace Measurement point n Meas point n 1 Video Signal AVG SAMPLE RMS MAX PEAK AUTO PEAK U H E MIN PEAK User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 27 R amp S9FSW K60 Measurement Basics Trace Evaluation The trace detector for the individual traces can be selected manually by the user or set automatically by the R amp S FSW The detectors of the R amp S FSW are implemented as pure digital devices All detectors work in parallel in the background which means that the measurement speed is inde pendent of the detector combination used for different traces Auto detector If the R amp S FSW is set to define the appropriate detector automatically the detector is set depending on the selected trace mode Trace mode Detector Clear Write Auto Peak Max Hold Positive Peak Min Hold Negative Peak Average Sample Peak View Blank 4 7 2 Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode If several measurements are performed one after the other or continuous measure ments are performed the trace mode determines how the data for subsequent traces is processed After each measurement the trace mode determines whether e the data is frozen View e the data is hidden Blank e the data is replaced by new values Clear Write e the data is replaced selectively Max Hold Min Hold Average o Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The tr
346. tails on available trigger levels see the data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 180 Trigger Level Trigger Settings Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 178 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 83 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration M I IIIIIIIIIILILNENLLIENELELIIGIBES SUS ss Trigger Settings Drop Out Time Trigger Settings Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 177 Trigger Offset Trigger Settings Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 177 Slope Trigger Settings For all trigger sources exc
347. tatus reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus The R amp S FSW Transient Analysis application uses only the registers provided by the base system For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual 11 11 Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate how to perform transient analysis in a remote environment Note that some of the used commands may not be necessary as they define default values but are included to demonstrate their use e Programming Example Performing a Basic Transient Analysis Measurement 280 e Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurement 281 e Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement 283 11 11 14 Programming Example Performing a Basic Transient Analysis Measurement This example demonstrates how to perform a basic transient analysis measurement for an unknown signal in a remote environment Jr h snneanas Preparing the measurement Reset the instrument RST Activate the transient analysis application EM User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 280 11 11 2 Programming Ex
348. te frequency span and an absolute time gate The frequency span is defined by an offset from the center frequency and an analysis bandwidth The time gate is defined by a starting point after measurement begin and the gate length e relative definition by linking the analysis region to the full capture buffer and defin ing a percentage of the full bandwidth and measurement time The specified frequency offset or time gate start are also considered for relative values Both methods can be combined for example by defining an absolute frequency span and a relative time gate mM Delta Freq Time Gate Length Meas Time Center Time Gate Freq Start Data Acquisition Full Capture Meas Bandwidth Aa xc Fig 4 8 Visualization of absolute analysis region parameters User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 23 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Basics 4 6 Measurement Range Processing data in the analysis region data zoom In result displays restricted to the analysis region only the data measured for the specified frequency range and within the defined time gate is considered Furthermore the analysis region data is taken only from the latest data acquisition that is only data that is still in the capture buffer is analyzed Restricting the results to an analysis region has the same effect as a data zoom the results are recalculated for a restricted data base The data in the capture buffer is fil tered
349. tection tab define the known hop states and the conditions for detection See chapter 6 3 2 Signal Detection Signal States on page 58 In the Frequency and Power subtabs define which parts of the hop will be considered when calculating frequency and power parameters e Inthe Analysis Region tab define the frequency range and time gate within the captured data which is to be analyzed that is which hops are to be detec ted See Analysis Region If necessary filter out unwanted signals using an FM video filter Demod Config softkey Select the Result Config button and configure the data basis for evaluation and display e Inthe Result Range tab define the area of the hop to be analyzed in the result display Define the area by a reference point a length and its alignment in relation to the hop s center or edges See chapter 7 2 1 Result Range on page 98 e Inthe Table Config tab define which parameters are to be displayed in the hop result tables e Inthe Scale and Units tabs configure the value range for the y axis in the individual result displays See chapter 7 2 3 Y Axis Scaling on page 102 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 see chapter 7 1 Display Configuration on page 97 N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 128 R amp S FSW K60 How to Perform Transient Analysis Se eS SSS SS Arrange them on the display to suit
350. ted chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Average Frequency on page 44 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency FREQuency SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average frequency from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only IESSE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 269 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pm S M I MM M ex Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm lt QueryRange gt Returns the maximum Frequency Deviation from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency Deviation Peak on page 44 SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp FREQuency MAXFm MAXimum lt
351. ter the resulting span and thus the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes In Auto mode the optimal resolution is determined automatically according to the data acquisition settings In Manual mode you must define the time resolution in seconds Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution AUTO on page 226 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SPECtrogram TRESolution on page 226 Measurement Time The measurement time and Record Length are interdependent and define the amount of data to be captured EEUU EE I EE E e e L L 1LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLILLSXJ User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 90 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration b T ULUL IMM a J W H Heaut Hop Chirp Measurement Settings The maximum measurement time in the R amp S FSW Transient application is limited only by the available memory memory limit reached message is shown in status bar Note however that increasing the measurement time and thus reducing the available memory space may restrict the number of measurement channels that can be activa ted simultaneously on the R amp S FSW Remote command SENSe MTIMe on page 184 6 8 Hop Chirp Measurement Settings For some frequency or power calculations it may be useful not to take the entire dwell time of the hop or length of the chirp into consideration but only a certain range within the dwell time length Thus it is possible to eliminate settling effec
352. th n 20 ccc ctteicesceetiedesecctieecesentte ceseeetieddesnettie SEENEN Ce 93 Sweep SettingsS iiie tiene EE og beeen eveedanceetesdacede n cevedeneeebsecdeees 94 Adjusting Settings Automatically eere nennen 96 PTA C TRM M S 97 Display Configutratlon 1i eege EES ne SEHR ERR LC ERR Rea ER 97 Result Configuratio srianan Raa Edge 97 Evaluation Basis eius an NENANA EEN Ee 104 Trace due Sonsan aa AANA SANRA 105 Trace Data Export Configuration eese 108 Spectrogram RTE dl e CN 110 Export FUNCTIONS C A 115 El i Ernie P 118 ZOOM FUNCHONS bee EE 124 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mod eese enne nnne nnn rnit 125 How to Perform Transient Analysis eee 127 How to Configure the Color Mapping eene 130 How to Export Table Data rire rir nen RAR n REIARRERAXRRRRRRRRRRRRRARRRARRRRRARA 133 Measurement Examples ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 134 Example Hopped FM Siginal 2 ccccccceseeesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseaneeeseseeeeeeseeeeeeeneanes 134 Example Chirped FM Signiall cccc seeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeesneaneeseeeeeneess 138 Optimizing and Troubleshooting eeeeeeereeeee 145 Remote
353. the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See Average Power on page 42 SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower MlNimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP POWer AVEPower SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the average power from the statistics table for the specified hop s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe HOP STATe lt QueryRange gt Returns the hop states from the Results table for the specified hop s SS H we User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 261 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis h a Ty Retrieving Results Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected hop CURRent Detected hops in the current capture buffer ALL All hops detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See State Index on page 40 SENSe HOP STATe AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP STATe MAXimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP STATe MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe HOP STATe SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical va
354. the error display 1 Region FM Time Domain DROE 1001 pts 300 0 ps 2 Region FM Deviation Time Domain 1001 pts 300 0 us Fig 5 6 Frequency Deviation Time Domain display with gaps where no complete chirps are detec ted The Frequency Deviation for the analysis region in the hop model is calculated as fol lows EN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 50 R amp SS9FSW K60 Measurement Results REGN GN GC m P m sra Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis FMerr k FM k fj hop start k hop start dwell time Where Average frequency estimate obtained from the frequency meas range of a hop In the chirp model it is calculated as chirp iength 2 FMerr k FM k frog kK Es chirp start k chirp start chirp length Where dfayg Average chirp rate estimate obtained from the frequency meas range of a chirp fes Average frequency estimate w r t the chirp center obtained from the frequency meas range of a chirp For an individual hop chirp k Result Range Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH FMER See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 PM Time Domain Displays the phase deviations of the demodulated PM signal in rad or versus time 4 Chirp PM Time Domain LAP Clrw 747 77752 100 9 9 847 43252 The PM time domain trace is determined as follows EEUU RA I EE EI E E e L LL
355. the largest of all positive peak values from the levels measured at the individual x values which are displayed in one trace point Negative Determines the smallest of all negative peak values from the levels Peak measured at the individual x values which are displayed in one trace point Average Calculates the linear average of all samples contained in a sweep point To this effect R amp S FSW uses the linear voltage after envelope detec tion The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divi ded by the number of samples linear average value Each sweep point thus corresponds to the average of the measured values sum med up in the sweep point The average detector supplies the average value of the signal irre spective of the waveform CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Sample Selects the last measured value of the levels measured at the individ ual x values which are displayed in one trace point all other mea sured values for the x axis range are ignored Remote command SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO on page 224 Hold If activated traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are not reset after specific parameter changes have been made Normally the measurement is started anew after parameter changes before the mea surement results are analyzed e g using a marker In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes the tr
356. the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point RMS Rm Calculates the root mean square of all samples contained in a measurement point The RMS detector supplies the power of the signal irrespective of the wave form CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Correc tion factors as needed for other detectors to measure the power of the different signal classes are not required Average Av Calculates the linear average of all samples contained in a measurement point To this effect R amp S FSW uses the linear voltage after envelope detection The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of samples linear average value For logarithmic display the logarithm is formed from the average value For linear display the average value is dis played Each measurement point thus corresponds to the average of the mea sured values summed up in the measurement point The average detector supplies the average value of the signal irrespective of the waveform CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Sample Sa Selects the last measured value of the levels measured at the individual fre quencies which are displayed in one sample point all other measured values for the frequency range are ignored The result obtained from the selected detector for a measurement point is displayed as the value at this x axis poin
357. the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed Trace settings can be configured via the TRACE key in the Traces dialog box or in the vertical Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For details see chapter 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 108 ERREUR E E e e LLLLLLLLILOLLILLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLULUUIUSXMI User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 105 R amp S9FSW K60 Analysis Trace Settings Traces TTL Transient Analysis Traces Trace Data Export Spectrogram Detector Statistics gt E E E lt 3 7 Auto Peak LIII LIII D Auto Peak H Lk E cn CENE Auto Peak at Auto Peak gt E o po eo H x ap Max Trace Points oe e Jm CD Quick Config Set Trace Mode Set Trace Mode Mox Avg Min Kiss Full RF Time Domain t 106 EE 106 Ense dac tei uev edad vendita ei ea as Ede ume Pun UL eR ede eech BL Re dave eee 107 Q 107 Statisucal Evaluation E 108 L Selected Hop Selected Chirp vs All Hops All Chile 108 L Sweep Average Count tntetn tete tentrtr ttt nth tete tan 108 L Maximum number of trace points 108 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys 2 esee teca 108 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration
358. the statistical value for the average power from the statistics table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp STATe lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp states from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SELected CURRent ALL SELected Selected chirp CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only Manual operation See State Index on page 43 SENSe CHIRp STATe AVERage lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp STATe MAXimum lt QueryRange gt ES User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 272 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Dee Retrieving Results SENSe CHIRp STATe MINimum lt QueryRange gt SENSe CHIRp STATe SDEViation lt QueryRange gt Returns the statistical value for the chirp states from the statistics table for the speci fied chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt CURRent ALL CURRent Detected chirps in the current capture buffer ALL All chirps detected in the entire measurement Usage Query only SENSe CHIRp TIMing BEGin lt QueryRange gt Returns the chirp begin time from the Results table for the specified chirp s Query parameters lt QueryRange gt SE
359. ti r no En Dn errore korea era 264 SENSe HOP TIMing SWITching SDEViation 2 cuentan tentant nea 264 CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe RESults lt Start gt lt End gt This command queries the hop results table The result is a comma separated list of value sets one set for each hop If no query parameters are specified the results for all detected hops are returned Which values are returned depends on the enabled parameters for the results tables see CALCulate HOPDetection TABLe COLumn on page 217 Query parameters Start integer The hop number of the first hop to be returned Hop numbers start at 1 End integer The hop number of the last hop to be returned Return values ID timestamp which corresponds to the absolute time the beginning of the hop was detected lt HopNo gt consecutive number of detected hop starts at 1 for each new measurement lt Statelndex gt consecutive number of corresponding nominal hop state as defined in the hop States table See CALCulate HOPDetection STATes DATA on page 189 Begin relative time in ms from the capture start at which the signal first enters the tolerance area of a nominal hop within the analy sis region Default unit ms lt DwellTime gt The duration of a hop from begin to end that is the time the sig nal remains in the tolerance area of a nominal hop frequency Default unit ms lt SwitchTime gt The time the signal require
360. ting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Setting parameters lt File gt path and file name Example MMEM STOR TA MEAS C R_S userdata MyMeas csv Example See chapter 11 11 3 Programming Example Performing a Hop Detection Measurement on page 283 Usage Setting only MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device M User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 279 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Status Reporting System For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 110 11 10 Status Reporting System The s
361. to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom DISPlay WINDowsn ZOOMMAREA aeiaai eec inden ee ante Iren Duce SEENEN 247 DISPlay WINDowsns ZOOM S TTG adu iecur peat Roto qe nno tae eae nena a re Eege dd 248 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on M User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 247 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis Analyzing Transient Effects 1
362. ts for instance For such cases a measurement range can be defined for power and frequency results in relation to specific hop or chirp characteristics These settings are only available if at least one of the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed The Power settings for example determine which part of the hop chirp is used to cal culate the average power in one hop chirp The Frequency settings determine which part of the hop chirp is used to calculate the average frequency in one hop chirp The ranges for both frequency and power measurements are defined by a reference point an offset from the reference point and the range length User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 91 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration Hop Chirp Measurement Settings Signal States Frequency Power Reference Length Offset Begin Offset End Fig 6 1 Measurement range settings for frequency results For details on the measurement range parameters see chapter 4 6 Measurement Range on page 24 PRT ase eerste retos dee i ed eee 92 E E ce accede 93 Offset Begin Offset Eid ase cheng inde anaiai auiii aiea aaia 93 Reference Defines the reference point for positioning the frequency power measurement range The Offset Begin Offset End is given with respect to this value Edge The measurement range is defined in reference to the rising or falling edge Center The measu
363. ue span in dB that can be displayed by the color map Note that the span actually used for the color map definition may be restricted see Start Stop on page 114 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe on page 219 Ref Level Position Spectrogram y scaling Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in where 0 96 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram For spectrograms this value defines the position of the reference level value within the span covered by the color map In this case the value is given in where O corre sponds to the maximum right end and 100 to the minimum left end of the color map Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 220 Units The unit for phase display is configurable This setting is described here Result Range Table Config Units Phase unit leet Seege TNT 104 Phase Unit Defines the unit in which phases are displayed degree or rad Remote command CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe on page 219 Evaluation Basis Depending on the measurement task not all of the measured data in the capture buffer may be of interest In some cases it may be useful to restrict analysis to a specific user definable region or to a selected individual chirp rate or hop Which evaluation basis is available for which result display is indicated in table 5
364. uency Hz ies doy fouonbai4 lt Nominal Hop Freq Time s Fig 5 2 Definition of the main hop parameters and characteristic values In order to obtain these results select the corresponding parameter in the result config uration see chapter 7 2 2 Table Configuration on page 99 or apply the required SCPI parameter to the remote command see chapter 11 6 5 Table Configuration on page 216 and chapter 11 9 1 Retrieving Information on Detected Hops on page 253 Hop ID and Hop number Each individual hop can be identified by a timestamp which corresponds to the abso lute time the beginning of the hop was detected In addition each hop is provided with a consecutive number which starts at 1 for each new measurement This is useful to distinguish hops in a measurement quickly Remote command SENSe HOP I D on page 260 SENSe HOP NUMBer on page 260 ucro o 40 usos EE 40 VEDI cL 40 ie E MINI EE 40 Average FICQUCNCY M 40 Hop State e ME 40 Frequency Deviation Peak ncc cies ceesacacce eek er teneo kun pae NEE docere aeo e 41 Frequency Deviation IIIS onec ciet ett etii ee da edd dE Red adden eal 41 Frequency Deviation Average eerie einen anin EENAA ANNEANNE 41 AMET AGG POW CN RE 42 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 39 R amp SSFSW K60 Measurement Results mm
365. ulated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the UO Analyzer for instance Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 159 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 68 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 dB Values of about 10 dB i e default set ting generally yield satisfactory results Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 159 Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table select the Write to lt CVL table name button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW on page 158 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH on page 158 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 68 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration H Input Output and Frontend Settings Write to CVL table name Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the
366. ults on page 265 SENSe CHIRp POWer AVEPower on page 271 5 3 Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis The data that was measured by the R amp S FSW can be evaluated using various different methods depending on the measurement task Table 5 1 Available evaluation methods and evaluation basis Measurement task Evaluation Evaluation basis Frequency domain analysis RF Spectrum Full capture buffer Analysis region Individual hop chirp Time domain analysis RF Power Time Domain Full capture buffer PM Time Domain Analysis region FM Time Domain Individual hop chirp PM Time Domain Wrapped chirp vs time Joint time frequency analysis Spectrogram Full capture buffer Analysis region Individual hop chirp Demodulation quality analysis Frequency Deviation Time Analysis region Domain Individual hop chirp requires additional option R amp S FSW K60C K60H User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 45 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Results a C Q A a Evaluation Methods for Transient Analysis Measurement task Evaluation Evaluation basis Signal characteristics Hop Chirp Results Table Analysis region Hop Chirp Statistics Table Online UO data transfer analysis RF Spectrum Full capture buffer Spectrogram RF Power Time Domain PM Time Domain FM Time Domain PM Time Domain Wrapped
367. ults tables see CALCulate CHRDetection TABLe COLumn on page 216 Query parameters lt Start gt integer The chirp number of the first chirp to be returned Chirp numbers start at 1 lt End gt integer The chirp number of the last chirp to be returned Return values lt ID gt Timestamp which corresponds to the absolute time the begin ning of the chirp was detected lt ChirpNo gt Consecutive number of detected chirp starts at 1 for each new measurement lt Statelndex gt Consecutive number of corresponding nominal chirp state as defined in the Chirp States table see CALCulate CHRDetection STATes DATA on page 188 lt Begin gt Time offset from the analyis region start at which the signal first enters the tolerance area of a nominal chirp Default unit ms lt Length gt The duration of a chirp from begin to end that is the time the signal remains in the tolerance area of a nominal chirp Default unit ms lt CRate gt Derivative of the FM vs time trace within the frequency measure ment range Default unit kHz us lt CRateDev gt Deviation of the detected chirp rate from the nominal chirp state in kHz us For details see Chirp State Deviation on page 43 Default unit kHz us lt FreqAvg gt Average frequency measured within the frequency measure ment range of the chirp Default unit kHz lt FMDevMax gt Maximum deviation of the chirp frequency from the nominal chirp frequency as defined in the Ch
368. um permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 159 LEE User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 159 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis DEE Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 68 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set tings SENS amp TMIXer FREQ ency HANDOVSL iiec eter taxat set ioco de hehe ER aab baat 160 ISGENGe Mixer EREOuencv STAR 160 SENSe MIXeD FREQUENCY STOP E 161 SENS amp MIXer HARMonic BAND BPRESet 2 rie ertet Lodo ub AANEREN EEN 161 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALuUue cesis nnne nennen 161 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe esses nennen rerit tenen nn nnns 162 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue sesenta 162 SENSe MIXerAARMOnIGH A dd oC el ele eee Om 162 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOWT cesses nnne t tet nh nh nnne n renes 163 BENSE MIX r LOSSHIGH EE 163 SENSe MIXer eg TE DEE 163 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW eene 163 SENSe MIXer LOSSC LOW eatenta ttn tentent ttt ttt tat tanta tutt taa 164 SENSE MINER POR TES dees dene ee Ed A A ESA 164 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe
369. ut Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 182 Level Output Type lt Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 181 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 182 RETE RA I E E RETE I e 11 1LL LL L L ALALLLLILS 2 User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 79 R amp S FSW K60 Configuration 6 5 Trigger Settings Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is s
370. values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted SS SST User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 147 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis EENEG Introduction 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by th
371. verage This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Parameters lt Average gt numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 66 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 66 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range EN User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 163 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis pm m K M ss Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4 Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 66 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 66 SENSe M
372. vered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument func tions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 7 R amp S9FSW K60 Preface mm D aOX I Conventions Used in the Documentation The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde A Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance
373. viation Time Domain display to a single chirp a Select the Frequency Deviation Time Domain display b Press the MEAS key then select Chirp to restrict the Frequency Deviation Time Domain display to a single chirp 3 Enable trace averaging for the Frequency Deviation Time Domain display a Press the TRACE key then select Trace Config b Fortrace 1 select the Mode Max Hold c For trace 2 select the Mode Average d Fortrace 3 select the Mode Min Hold e Define an average count of 1000 The display now shows the trace statistics as output of an auto peak detector of one chirp User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 142 R amp S FSW K60 Measurement Examples Example Chirped FM Signal For statistics over multiple chirps you must define a common result range to make sure that statistics are calculated over time intervals of a constant length a From the Meas Config menu select Result Config b In the Result Range tab set Automatic Range Scaling to Off c Set the result range Alignment to the Center of the chirp d Set the result range Length to 90 us After averaging 1000 chirps you see not only the the FM spike on the max trace but also a sinusoidal interference on the average trace 5 Chirp FM Error Time Domain 1 Max s2 Avg 3 Min Fig 9 13 Min average max traces for chirp Frequency Deviation To limit the noise bandwidth using a video filter The noise bandwidth can be reduced using
374. visible columns in the result display are exported All All columns including currently hidden ones for the result display are exported Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TABLe on page 277 Decimal Separator Table Export Configuration Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 278 Export Table to ASCII File Table Export Configuration Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected result table in ASCII format DAT to the specified file and directory Note To store the measurement results for all traces and tables in all windows use the Export Trace to ASCII File command in the Save Recall Export menu See also chapter 7 5 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 108 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device T User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 116 R amp S FSW K60 Analysis LEG C ee Export Functions For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage m
375. w Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values Numene Vallesia a aa a aa aa aaa aiaia 149 SEET 150 e GhSracter Data camis ce esce IRR exe eni sat ccs disease tag da ge eu ria sud ea ada ED daa Y guine 150 e Character SIIIge c teer mre Ene enne ctn ee ne ee Eher e xxu et et RR nee 151 e Block DAU etie tien t bic ce ACEN Ze 151 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value N User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 149 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding
376. window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 207 for a list of availa ble window types Defining the Evaluation Basis Depending on the measurement task not all of the measured data in the capture buffer may be of interest In some cases it may be useful to restrict analysis to a specific user definable region or to a selected individual chirp rate or hop Which measurement basis is available for which result display is indicated in table 5 1 These commands are only available if the additional options R amp S FSW K60C K60H are installed DISPlayWINDowsne JEVA L conais iaa ia weasuedesavastady cued AA a 212 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt EVAL lt Eval gt Determines the evaluation basis for the specified result display Which evaluation basis is available for which result display is indicated in table 5 1 Parameters lt Eval gt FULL REGion SIGNal FULL the full capture buffer REGion the selected analysis region see chapter 11 4 11 Selecting the Analysis Region on page 196 SIGNal an individual selected hop chirp see CALCulate HOPDetection SELected on page 215 CALCulate CHRDetection SELected on page 215 RST depends on result display Example DISP WIND1 EVAL SIGN Example See chapter 11 11 2 Programming Example Performing a Chirp Detection Measurem
377. y The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the highest level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker SS Y MMMMMM M M User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 246 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis 11 6 11 11 6 11 1 Analyzing Transient Effects Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a delta marker vertically
378. your preferences 9 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 10 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps or calculate hop statistics on the Traces tab see chapter 7 4 Trace Settings on page 105 e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the signal on the Marker tab see chapter 7 8 Marker Settings on page 118 e Configure the Spectrogram display or FFT parameters on the Spectrogram tab see chapter 7 6 Spectrogram Settings on page 110 11 Optionally export the trace data of the demodulated signal to a file a Inthe Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK To detect chirps in a transient measurement This procedure requires the additional option R amp S FSW K60C to be installed 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the Transient application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Transient Analysis 3 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 4 Select the Data Acquisition button and define the bandwidth parameters for the input sig
379. z TTRACevtSCALelbRLEVelOFtzet ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeteeeeeees 173 INP GAINES TA c c t 174 IMPut GAIN VAlugl recie reete EN SEENEN EEN 174 INPUT AT SnugllOfi 22s pete ec ee EES ANERE 174 INPutATTenuationtAL e EEN 175 let AU ec 175 lef bd zz UE NI s DEE 176 INPUCEAT RR ug c 176 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 76 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset I User Manual 1175 6478 02 02 173 R amp S FSW K60 Remote Commands to Perform Transient Analysis a a a ee Se Configuring Transient Analysis Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 76 INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on and off The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B24 on page 77 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP G

R&S FSW Transient Measurements User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW Transient Measurements User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW Transient Measurements User Manual